JP2021074608A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase players' interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images can execute an arrangement direction change performance to change the direction in which a plurality of reservation icons displayed on the display means are arranged, where one of the plurality of types of images is a reservation icon.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 92

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball wins a prize at the starting port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
It is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
In the arrangement direction change effect, the angles of the plurality of hold icons in the line-up direction change while maintaining the display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine according to the application example 1 or the application example 2.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction after the line-up angle changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 3
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction while maintaining the display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 4.
In the arrangement direction change effect, in the display means, the display position of one or more of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons is changed, so that the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged is changed. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 4.
The display means is configured to be rotatable and can be rotated.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the rotation of the display means changes the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination tables T1 to T4, T10. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the right rotation of the left sub-display device 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the left sub-display device 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the right sub-display device 10R. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the left rotation of the right sub-display device 10R. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the right sub-display device 10R. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the left-right sub-display device 10. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the advance movement of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the rotation operation of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st combination effect of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd combination effect of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display device interlocking effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display device interlocking effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display device interlocking effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display device interlocking effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the plurality-image pseudo-continuous production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the plurality-image pseudo-continuous production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the plurality-image pseudo-continuous production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the plurality-image pseudo-continuous production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold arrangement direction change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold arrangement direction change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold arrangement direction change effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold arrangement direction change effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold movement effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold movement effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold movement effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold movement effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the information display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the information display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the information display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the information display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold change suggestion effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold change suggestion effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold change suggestion effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold change suggestion effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern display mode effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern display mode effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern display mode effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern display mode effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern variation effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pseudo continuous production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pseudo continuous production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pseudo continuous production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pseudo continuous production D. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern facing effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern facing effect B. It is explanatory drawing which exemplifies the decorative pattern facing effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the decorative pattern facing effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern look-ahead effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image tilt display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image tilt display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image tilt display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image tilt display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern button stop effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern button stop effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern button stop effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern button stop effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the effect execution confirmation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the effect execution confirmation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the effect execution confirmation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the effect execution confirmation effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the bidirectional group production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the bidirectional group production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the bidirectional group production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the bidirectional group production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition ball output display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition ball output display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition ball output display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition ball output display effect D.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction seen by the player facing the gaming machine 1. Also,
The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is inside the gaming machine frame 50.
Is attached. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61.
It is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the player, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The frame lamp 66 is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, a main display device 7, a sub display device 10, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, and a fixed winning device (navel) 1.
9, the normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, the gate (through chucker) 28, and the first
Large winning device (1st attacker) 31, 2nd large winning device (2nd attacker) 36, large winning opening opening opening 17, general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), out opening 16 The display devices 40 and the like are provided.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down.
A plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp 66R and the left frame lamp 66L, and is configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The main display device 7 is an image display device provided near the center of the game area 3 and provided with a display screen 7a. The main display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 has the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C,
8R has an effect symbol display area in which variable display (also referred to as variable display) is performed.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The main display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the main display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. After that, the production design 8L,
The effect of displaying 8C and 8R is "Variation effect of production pattern", "Variation effect of decorative pattern", or
It is also simply called "variable effect" or "variable display". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The main display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the main display device 7 is an identification display capable of suggesting that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The sub-display device 10 includes a left sub-display device 10L and a right sub-display device 10R, each of which is an image display device arranged in front of the main display device 7. The left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are movable gimmicks each having a display screen, and the position and orientation of the display screen can be changed by a mechanism unit (not shown). Like the main display device 7, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R may be liquid crystal display devices, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, and a dot matrix. It may be. The left sub-display device 10L is arranged at the lower left of the main display device 7 and has a first hold image display area on which the hold image 9A is displayed. In the first reserved image display area, the reserved image 9A is displayed according to the number of stored first special figure reservations described later. The right sub-display device 10R is arranged at the lower right of the main display device 7, and the reserved image 9B
It has a second reserved image display area in which is displayed, and a reserved digested image display area in which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. have. In the second reserved image display area, the reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations described later. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C or the hold icon 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to as a hold icon. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen of the sub display device 10, and the first special feature is displayed by displaying the hold digestion image 9C. It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the figure hold or the second special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

On the left and right sides of the main display device 7, there is a movable first board movable body 1 which is a movable so-called gimmick.
4 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14) is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semicircular members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the main display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to be close to each other (the first movable accessory 14 is stationary). (Advance) and can stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 53 to 55). 1st movable accessory 1
4 covers a part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the upper side of the main display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (a movable so-called gimmick) (
A second movable accessory 15) is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the main display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It can be stationary at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a (FIGS. 56 to 59). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the sub display device 10. The stage portion 11
It has a shape that can guide a game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the sub display device 10. Warp part 12
Provided an entrance portion through which the game balls flow in and an outlet portion through which the game balls flow out, and causes the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion to flow out from the exit portion to the stage portion 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 are arranged.
The image displayed in is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a small number of types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the main display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. A mouth, a fixed starting port) 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a lottery of the first special symbol (
It is an opportunity for a big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is a lottery of the second special symbol (small hit and big hit lottery).
It is an opportunity for. The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is open than when it is closed, and when the movable member 23 is closed, the second starting port 21 may be entered. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting opening 21, a jackpot random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired jackpot random number is used. It refers to a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot by comparing it with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the main display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

In addition, the "small hit lottery of special symbols" is when a game ball wins a prize at the second starting opening 21.
A small hit random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired small hit random number is used as a predetermined ".
It refers to a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made by comparing with a value corresponding to "small hit".
The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and the lottery is performed when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. The special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the main display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the small hit. ..

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not it is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 has a V region (specific region) 39 and a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3) inside.
), The non-V region (non-specific region) 70, the non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3), the first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (. FIG. 3) and. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 is
The game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 is distributed to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. In the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized,
It is in the second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70 located at the origin. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 is placed in the V region 3.
It suffices to have a function of allocating to either 9 or the non-V region 70, and may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2, for example. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 in a retracted state (first state), and the V
When the opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70 (advanced state).
It may be configured to be in the second state). In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability variation operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic operating port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is V
A region 39 and a non-V region 70 are provided at a point where they meet downstream, and the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a is counted.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small hit attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special). It is equipped with a winning opening) 35. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. This second large winning device operates when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 21 and wins a small hit lottery.
It is a small hit attacker.

The large winning opening opening opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3.
When the game ball passes, the first big winning opening 30 is opened.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is a game area 3
A game ball that is provided at the lower part of the box and does not win a prize in any of the winning openings is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side.
There is. The method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, the method of firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is "
Call it "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, right-handed to pass through the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the first winning opening 30, and
It is configured so that a prize can be aimed at the second large prize opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and the like.
The second special figure holding indicator 43b and the normal drawing holding indicator 44 are included. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 variably displays the ordinary symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold).
The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 is a normal symbol display 42 operation hold (normal figure hold).
Displays the number of memories of. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbol”. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display), and then stops and displays a lottery (big hit lottery) based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. Notify the result. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. In addition, the big prize opening in the big hit game (1st
The opening patterns of the large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops the display to notify the result of the lottery (small hit lottery) based on the winning of the second starting port 21. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, a special game (small hit game) in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern is performed. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), "○○ ●● ○○ ●●"
The jackpot symbol with the LEDs 1, 2, 5, and 6 from the left lit is displayed, such as (○: on, ●: off). If a small hit is won, the small hit symbol with the first and second LEDs from the left lit is displayed, such as "○○ ●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If there is a loss, the LED on the far right, such as "●●●●●●● ○"
Display the lost symbol that only lights up. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. In the variable display mode, each LED is a stop display (
If it is not displayed in a specific mode), the lighting mode is not limited to the above, and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if a prize is won in the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure hold storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure hold, and the second start port 21
If the prize is won, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 20 is used.
When the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or the special game is being executed. However, the right to the jackpot lottery for the winning can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs.
Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, the LED on the right will be displayed as "● ○".
Display the normal lost pattern with only lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as the normal symbol hold. It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, the gate 28
If the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to is not possible immediately after the passage,
That is, even if a prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game, the right of the normal symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and the image control board 100,
A sub-control unit is formed together with the lamp control board 107 and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80.
The progress of the game of the game machine 1 is controlled according to the program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later.
The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. Game control microcomputer 81
Sends and receives data to and from other boards and the like via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, and the first 2 big prize opening sensor 35a
, V region sensor 39a, non-V region sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. As the solenoids connected via the relay board 88, the electric chew solenoid 2
4. The first special winning opening solenoid 33, the second special winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 are exemplified. The large winning opening open start port sensor 17a is a large winning opening open start opening 1
A game ball provided inside the 7 and entered into the large winning opening opening opening 17 is detected. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 2
The game ball that won 1 is detected. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28.
A game ball that has passed through the gate 28 is detected. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is the first large winning opening 3
A game ball provided inside 0 and winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30 is detected. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and the V region sensor 39a is provided.
A game ball that has passed through the area 39 is detected. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Indicator 4
Display control for 4.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87.
The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. Ball rental payout device 13
0 means paying out the ball for rent. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112
It includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114, and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 by the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95.
The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is
It includes a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub CPU 92 that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. .. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. Production control microcomputer 91
Sends and receives data to and from other boards and the like via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Sub control board 9
The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to 0 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the main display device 7 and the sub display devices 10 (left sub display device 10L, right sub display device 10R) according to a program. Do it. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104.
In addition to the program for performing display control, the ROM 103 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols. Etc. (including production symbols) and image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data.
The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 is an image control microcomputer 10 based on a command received from the main control board 80.
1 is made to control the display of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 1
In 06, a CPU may be mounted, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the image control board 10
Acoustic data may be stored in ROM 103 of 0.

The sub-display device 10, the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the sub display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a sub display device 10, a first movable accessory 14, and a second.
Operation pattern data (drive data) that determines each operation mode of the movable accessory 15 is created, and the operations of the sub-display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are performed according to the operation pattern data. Control. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU.
The CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the lamp and the operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on the command. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may be mounted.
Data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a is a effect button 63 (FIG. 1).
) Is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed.

3. 3. Data structure of the gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6 (B) shows the sub R
It is a figure for demonstrating the storage area provided in AM94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5 (A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T.
4, big hit type judgment table T5, fluctuation pattern judgment table T6, electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, big winning opening opening pattern judgment table T8, V opening / closing member opening pattern judgment table T9, small hit judgment table T10 and are stored.
These determination tables are the main control main processes (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81.
Is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, and the like. A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is the main control main process (described later).
Is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set, such as a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, a small hit flag, a V flag, a probability change flag, and a time saving flag. Is set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 is the first special figure reservation storage area 8 in which the first special figure reservation is stored.
It includes 5a and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. First storage area for storage,
A second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. 2nd special figure reserved storage area 8
In 5b, the first storage area and the second storage area for storing the random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure hold, respectively. , A third storage area and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 is the first, second, third, and fourth of the normal figure hold.
A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing a random number value group (holding information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to each item. There is.
In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the sub-display device 10 and the movable accessories 14 and 15. A drive data buffer or the like is provided.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. ,
A probabilistic effect counter, a time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7 (A
) Indicates a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and is shown in FIG. 7 (B).
) Indicates a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The game control microcomputer 81 includes "big hit random numbers", "big hit type random numbers", "reach random numbers", and "
It is configured to acquire "variable pattern random numbers", "ordinary symbol random numbers (hit random numbers)", and "small hit random numbers" at the timing described later. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. "Big hit type random number" is a lottery of the winning big hit type (big hit type judgment)
It is a random number used for, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take.
Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state is the display screen 7.
It may be displayed as if it is shaking in a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127.
The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "small hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (small hit determination) for whether or not it is a small hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Big hit random number", "Big hit type random number", "Big hit type random number"
The "reach random number" and the "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The "small hit random number" is acquired based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is the first special figure reserved storage area 8.
The random number value group stored in 5a and acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. 8 (D) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, FIG. 8 (D) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8 (E) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4. , A diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10 is shown.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164" in the "normal probability state", it is determined as "big hit" (about probability 1/397), and the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164". Numerical values other than (16)
In the case of "5 to 65535)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Also,"
In the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit" (about 1/101), and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than "0 to 649" (650 to 65).
In the case of "535)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". "Normal probability state"
And the contents of the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, whether the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "
It is a table referred to to determine whether it corresponds to "no reach". The reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the above-acquired jackpot random number value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8B, the reach random value is “0 to 1” in the “non-time saving state”.
In the case of "3", it is determined that there is "reach", and the reach random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 13 (1).
In the case of "4-127)", it is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. Also,"
In the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined to be "with reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", " It is shown that it is judged as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). ~ 255) ”,“ Loss ”
It is shown that it is determined. In addition, in the "time saving state", the normal symbol random value is "0".
In the case of "~ 254", it is determined to be "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined to be "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). The table referenced to do so. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

In the small hit determination table T10, the game control microcomputer 81 is the main control main process (described later).
Is a table referred to in order to determine whether the acquired small hit random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "small hit" or "loss". The small hit determination table T10 is not referred to when the above-acquired big hit random value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8 (E), when the small hit random number value is "0 to 63" in all states (regardless of the gaming state), it is determined as "small hit" (probability 1/2), and the small hit disorder When the numerical value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". The small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when the game ball wins the second start opening 21 (not referred to when the game ball wins the first start opening 20). Further, the small hit determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when it is determined to be a "big hit".

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "41-82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the stop symbol of special figure 2 (special figure stop symbol) is "big hit symbol 2".
Is determined. When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is "1".
It is determined that "6R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is determined, and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", the "round designation command", and the "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V scheduled jackpot"
, "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state.
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 2 is in a non-time saving state.
It wins 0, is judged as "missing" in the jackpot judgment table T1, is judged as "with reach" in the reach judgment table T2, the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 0". In the case of "60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In addition, the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted in the non-time saving state (because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 in the non-time saving state, the time saving state (high accuracy and high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state). When the time is shortened, the probability is low, and the base is low), the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted), and the jackpot determination table T1 determines that the jackpot is "big hit".
In 5, it was judged as "16RV passing jackpot" and "big hit symbol 2 (21H)".
When the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P22". Further, in the non-time saving state, the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted, it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 0".
In the case of "127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34".

In FIG. 11, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a short time state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines “missing”, and the reach determination table T2 “no reach”.
When the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4" and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P56". In addition, the second starting port 21 is won in a short time state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1 and "16RV passing jackpot" and "big hit symbol 2 (21H)" in the jackpot type determination table T5. , Fluctuation pattern When the random value is "0 to 127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62". Further, when the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P74". It has been shown to be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. For example, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted in the non-time saving state and it is determined to be a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 15000 msec. Further, when the second starting port 21 is won in a time-saving state and a small hit is determined, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high probability high base state), it is also during the small hit rush (RUSH) period described later until the next big hit, that is, during the small hit rush period, when the second starting port 21 is won. Since the fluctuation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small hits occur frequently in a short time. Then, during the small hit rush period, you can aim for a big hit while increasing the number of game balls you have. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. SP
In 1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 and SP5 is, for example,
It may be the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream. In particular, SP5 has a variation pattern of a dedicated reach in which a pseudo jackpot suggestion effect is performed by winning a prize at the second starting port 21 during the small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in the time saving state (high accuracy and high base state) described later. "P62"). It should be noted that SP5 also occurs during the hold digestion of the second starting port 21 when the time saving state (high accuracy high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state, low accuracy low base state) is reached. In some cases, a pseudo jackpot suggestion effect can be performed in this case as well (variation pattern “P22”).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12 (B
) Indicates the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. Open pattern 11
Then, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the number of opening times is 3, the opening time per opening is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval).
The electric chew 22 is opened for 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13 (A),
As a big winning opening opening pattern in the jackpot game, the special figure stop symbol data is "11H",
When it is "12H", "20H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and the special figure stop symbol data is "1".
When "4H", "15H", and "22H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H". , It is shown that the opening pattern of the first winning opening 30 and the second winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 23". Further, in FIG. 13A, as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game, when the special figure stop symbol data is “20H”, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 is determined to be “opening pattern 25”. , When the special figure stop symbol data is "21H",
It is shown that the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".

FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23 as the winning opening opening patterns in the jackpot game. Open pattern 2
In 1, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (long opening) for 29.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. Open the second big winning opening 35 (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and at the 15th round, the number of openings is 1
The first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. Open the 2nd prize opening 35 (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and at the 16th round,
The second big winning opening 35 (long opening) is opened once with one opening time and an opening time of 29.5 seconds. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 13C shows the contents of the opening pattern 25 and the opening pattern 26 as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game. In the opening pattern 25, the second large winning opening 35 with an opening time of 1.0 second is opened once. In the opening pattern 26, the second large winning opening 35 is opened 5 times and the opening time is 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is not opened, and only the second big winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern 25 is the second during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game and after the end of the small hit rush when the "16RV passing big hit" is made by the big hit symbol 1 (20H) of the special figure 2. The start port 21 is held during digestion. The opening pattern 26 is the second starting port during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game and after the end of the small hit rush when the "16RV passing big hit" is made by the big hit symbol 2 (21H) of the special figure 2. 21 holds are made during digestion. That is, the open pattern 26 is a variation pattern (“P62) of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect described later is performed.
It is an opening pattern of the small hit game performed after the big hit game when the big hit is made via "). In other words, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game is different between when the jackpot is achieved via the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect and when the jackpot is achieved without passing through the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The game control microcomputer 81 is the main control main process of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (
In (described later), it is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “20H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33". Stop symbol data is "15H
"Or" 22H ", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be" opening pattern 34 ". In FIG. 14B, the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, and the opening pattern 3 are shown.
3 and the contents of the opening pattern 34 are shown. In the open pattern 31, 2, 4, 6
, In the 8th round, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, V with an opening time of 0.1 seconds
Short-open the opening / closing member 71. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. 8
In the 10th round, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the maximum opening time is reached. 31
.. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for 5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize.
When the second prize is won, the V opening / closing member 71 with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds is opened for a long time. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, the 1st prize opening 30
When the first prize is won, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the open pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, the 1st prize opening 30
When the first prize is won, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened.

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In game machine 1, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game consists of multiple round games (unit open game), the opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends (the final round game).
ED) and is included. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. When a small hit is won, a "small hit game" is executed in which the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of big hit that triggered the occurrence of the small hit rush described later. To.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-non-passing scheduled jackpot".
The "V-passing planned jackpot (probability variable jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and is an opening / closing member 32, an opening / closing member 37, and a V opening / closing member. It is a big hit that operates 71. In addition, "V passing big hit (V
In "Probability change jackpot)", the game state becomes a high probability high base state from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, and during that period, the second starting port 21 is frequently won and a small hit is won. It will be the small hit rush period that occurs. Here, the special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 1
The jackpots of 4H, 20H, and 21H correspond to the "V-passing scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31).
(Open pattern 22: Open pattern 33) or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 3)
At the time of 2), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 It is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. In addition, in the "V non-passing planned jackpot (normal jackpot)", the game state becomes a low probability low base state after the end of the jackpot game, and it becomes difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 during that period. There is no small hit rush period after the big hit game is over. Here, the special figure stop symbol data is 15H,
The jackpot of 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region is in the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39.
As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

"V-passing jackpot" is "16RV-passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 13R)
) V-passing jackpot ”and“ 16R (actually 15R) V-passing jackpot ”are included. The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

Although the total number of rounds of the "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 3
0 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the 1st big winning opening 30 is 1
Only 0.1 seconds per R is opened, and even in 14R and 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

Although the total number of rounds of the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big winning opening 35
Is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R, the 2nd prize opening 35 is 1R.
Only 0.1 seconds per hit (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, this "16R (
In "actually 15R) V-passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short and no prize ball can be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, V opening / closing member 71
Is long open (FIG. 14: open pattern 32), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even with 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13).
: Open pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. In other words, "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is actually 13R
It is a big hit. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34).
, It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first prize opening 30.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the jackpot scheduled to pass V (big hit with small hit rush).
The jackpot scheduled to pass through V is 60/128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the jackpot scheduled to pass V (big hit with small hit rush), and V non-passing scheduled. 4 jackpots
It is 5/128 (about 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the second starting opening 21 is more than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 20.
The jackpot lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol), in which the game ball is won, is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 is a special symbol display 4
"Probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" can be executed for the special symbol displayed in 1 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variation state)", and the probability fluctuation The uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high-probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 is
Judgment of the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time reduction state in the time reduction state. Do it. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 is
For the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control may be executed at the same time, or only one of them may be executed. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment in which the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control are executed at the same time is shown.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state.
In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of the normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be hit is larger in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Game control microcomputer 8
In a situation where 1 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, these controls are performed. Compared to the case where it is not executed, the electric chew 22 is released more frequently, and the second
A game ball will frequently win a prize at the starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the electric chew 22.
By executing one or more of the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 and the opening number increasing control for the electric chew 22, the electric chew 2 is more than when the control is not executed.
It suffices if 2 is easily released. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 10,000 times. That is, the high accuracy and high base state is actually the next big hit (next big hit).
It ends when the jackpot game is executed by winning the game. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low-probability state), a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". Low accuracy low base state is "normal game state",
Alternatively, it may be referred to as a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is this low probability and low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there is also a gaming state of a normal probability state (non-high probability state, that is, a low probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state (electric support control state), and this gaming state is particularly "low". It is called "high probability base state" and "low probability time saving state" (a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is called a "specific game state"). In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, a large number of starting prizes (winning to the second starting port 21) can be obtained and small hits can be generated frequently, rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, the left game area 3A is left-handed.
It is possible to advance the game more advantageously by letting the game ball enter (Fig. 1). This is because the electric support control is not executed in the low base state, so the electric chew 2 is compared with the high base state.
This is because it is difficult to open 2 and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21, that is, winning a prize in the first starting port 20 is more difficult than winning a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because it is easy. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. As a result, more start prizes (first start port 20) than right-handed
You can get a prize).

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The game control microcomputer 8 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) based on FIGS. 15 to 34.
The operation of 1 will be described. The counter that appears in the operation explanation of the game control microcomputer 81,
Flags, statuses, buffers, etc. are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / miss determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss pre-determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003).
In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 is shown in FIG. 7 (A).
Various random number counter values shown in (Big hit random number value, Big hit type random number value, Reach random number value,
Fluctuation pattern random value, normal symbol random value, small hit random value) is added and updated by 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt processing is performed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 4).
It is executed every msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is shown in FIG.
The various random number counter values shown in (A) are updated. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values includes the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and
It is performed in both other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S10).
2). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start port sensor detection process (step S103).
), Normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and reserved ball number processing (step S107) are executed in this order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81
Performs output processing (step S108). In the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81
Outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, special figure 2 described later
Based on the number of reserved balls, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled in a display mode showing the number, and special drawing 1
Based on the number of reserved balls, the first special figure holding indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. The number of balls reserved for normal symbols is "
In the case of "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S202: NO)
Step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 uses a value of a normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H).
The value of) is acquired, and the acquired random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the first to fourth storage areas of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If no game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special figure 2 reserved ball number of "4 (step S205: YES)".
(Upper limit value) ”is determined (step S206). Special figure 2 What is the number of reserved balls?
It is the number of the second special figure hold, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure hold. Special figure 2 If the number of reserved balls is "4" (step S
206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). −
TRND-RC value), fluctuation pattern random number counter value (Fig. 7: Label-TRND-T1)
(Value of) and the value of the small hit random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-K). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the first to fourth second special figure hold storage areas 85b.
Of the storage areas, it is stored in the storage area according to the current number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. Memory (retention)
Let me. After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (
Step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S211). Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is the first
It is the number of special figure reservations, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure reservations. Special Figure 1 If the number of reserved balls is "4" (step S21)
1: YES), this process is terminated. Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or less (step S21)
1: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired according to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 is
For the special figure 1 pre-judgment process (FIG. 19) described later, the acquired random number value group is temporarily stored (retained) in a buffer (pre-judgment buffer) different from the first special figure hold storage area 85a. ..
After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON ().
Step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. on the other hand,
When the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8).
), The jackpot pre-judgment is performed with reference to the high-probability state table (step S3).
02). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first receives a random number acquisition process related to special figure 2 (FIG. 1).
7: In step S208), a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer is acquired. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81
Is a table for a high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" in the jackpot judgment table T1.
"-" 649 ") to determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, "missing".
In advance. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used for the preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9).
), Make a preliminary judgment of the jackpot type. Here, the jackpot type random value is "
Any of "0" to "127" is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passage jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (the time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the random value and the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is pre-determined from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence / absence pre-determination result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "
If it is "1-2", the selected fluctuation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the selected fluctuation pattern "P68" is selected. In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T is used.
Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from 6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. Game control microcomputer 8
1 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON ().
Step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-judgment process, when the probability change flag is ON (
Step S401: YES), this process is completed. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: N).
O), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a random number related to the special figure 1 (FIG. 17: step S).
213) acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer. Next, here, since it is a normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF),
The game control microcomputer 81 predetermines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”) in the jackpot determination table T1.
That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S404 to S408 are performed in step S30 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18).
Since it is the same as 4 to S308, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not operating (step S501: NO)
, The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S5).
02). When the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process is step S50.
Skip to 8. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S).
503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends.
When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, step S207 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17).
And in step S212, the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then in step S1404 and step S1410 in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later.
In, the hold is digested and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has an ordinary symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit.
For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is "hit".
If the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is judged as "missing" (Fig. 8 (C).
)reference).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8 (D).
))) To select a variation pattern (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the game has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S50)
8: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the hit determination (step S505) described above is "missing", the fluctuation display is stopped. (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YE).
S), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (
It is selected with reference to FIG. 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, "open pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the non-time saving state.
Is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S5011).
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 elapses and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520)
: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "special operation status".
They are called "1", "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, a variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S130)
1: NO, step S1303: YES), processing during special symbol change is performed (step S).
1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S130)
3: NO, step S1305: YES), perform special symbol determination processing (step S1)
306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303,
S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

In the special operation process, the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display 41b are independently executed, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. It may be configured to allow simultaneous fluctuations. In this case, the first special symbol display 4
The processing related to 1a and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is "1", "2", "2" of "Special Figure 1 Operation Status", respectively. 3
, "4". In addition, the processing related to the second special symbol display 41b and the grand prize device is 4
Divided into two stages, and each stage is "1", "2", "3" of "Special Figure 2 Operation Status".
, Called "4". The initial setting of "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not any of the "special figure 1 operation status" and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" or "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "4", special electric accessory processing is performed. In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special figure 1 is "4", the big hit game by the big hit of the special figure 1 is executed. When the operation status of the special figure 2 is "4", the big hit game or the small hit game by the big hit of the special figure 2 is executed. When neither "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" nor "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "4", the game control microcomputer 81 has "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" of "1", "2", or "3". "Is determined. "Special figure 1 operation status" is "
At the time of "1", special figure 1 standby processing is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, the hit determination and the fluctuation pattern selection of the special figure 1 are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", the special figure 1 changing process is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation processing, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", the special figure 1 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 1 confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. "Special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3"
After making the determination, the game control microcomputer 81 has a "special figure 2 operation status" of "1".
"," 2 ", or" 3 ". When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1", the special figure 2 standby process is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, the hit determination and the fluctuation pattern selection of the special figure 2 are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", the special figure 2 changing process is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation processing, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 confirmation process is performed. Special figure 2
In the confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of the present embodiment, the standby process, the variable process, and the final process of the special figure 1 and the standby process, the variable process, and the final process of the special figure 2 are executed in parallel. To. On the other hand, the big hit game and the small hit game are executed in preference to the standby processing, the variation processing, and the final processing of the special figures 1 and 2.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1400). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process is step S
Move to 1407. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1400: N
O), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the small hit determination process (step S1401). In the small hit determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a small hit determination with reference to the small hit determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the small hit random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. It is read out, and whether or not it is a small hit is determined using the read small hit random value and the small hit determination table T10. Next, when the result of the small hit determination is "small hit", the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the small hit symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , End this process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1).
404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 is the first to fourth of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b.
The storage location of the reserved information (various random values) stored in the storage area is shifted by one from the current position to the side to be read, and is stored in the location farthest from the side to be read in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. Clear the pending information (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so,
Clear the hold information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9B (four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed.
Of these, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side and displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B).
Shift one to the left (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, it should be noted.
The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is
Information about the special symbol stop symbol data set in the small hit determination process (step S1401), information about the special symbol stop symbol data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402), and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Contains information about the set fluctuation pattern (including information about the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" (step S1401:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “0” (step S1407). Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S140)
7: YES), that is, when the first special figure reservation storage area 85a does not have the memory of the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20, the process proceeds to step S1413.
When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410).
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first
Special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the hold digestion image display area side and is displayed as the hold digestion image 9C. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9 from the left).
Each of A) shifts to the right by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 is described in FIG.
The fluctuation start process is performed (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. For the variable time timer,
The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 is, for example, ON / O of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers.
It may be judged by FF. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414)
, Finish this process. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501)
: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high-probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 8
In No. 1, first, the jackpot random number value as the determination value is read out. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. here,
Since it is in the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

When the probability change flag is OFF in step S1501 (step S1501: NO
), The game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot judgment table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES)
), The game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S15).
06), the jackpot type is determined (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type,
The special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is "missing" (the result of the small hit determination is also "missing"), the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. Set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and end this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 show fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S14).
09) is a flowchart of 09). Fluctuation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403)
Since the processing flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 is the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the jackpot flag of the game control microcomputer 81 is O.
It is determined whether or not it is N (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1610). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1)
610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small hit flag is ON (
Step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the fluctuation pattern by referring to the non-time saving state small hit table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first sets the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as the table for the non-time saving state small hit, the part corresponding to the small hit (the part where the fluctuation pattern is “P34”) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 is referred to. (The address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, "P34" is selected as the variation pattern.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 8
In step 1, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604).
), The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure stop symbol data set in the main RAM 84.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates with reference to the table for the jackpot scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Select a pattern (step S160)
5). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the first special figure reserved storage area 85
The fluctuation pattern random value stored in the first storage area of a (corresponding to the first item on hold of the first special figure) is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern is "P1". ~ "P3
, In the special figure 2, the address to which the fluctuation pattern is referred to (the part of “P21” and “P22”) is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P21" or "P22" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Select the fluctuation pattern (step S16).
06). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is The address to which the "P4" to "P6" part and the part whose fluctuation pattern is "P23" in Special Figure 2) is referred to is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random value, any one of "P4" to "P6" is used as the fluctuation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P6" is shown in Special Figure 2.
"P23" is selected.

When the small hit flag is OFF in step S1610 (step S1610:
NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the fluctuation pattern selection process of Special Figure 2, the second
The reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, because it is in a non-time saving state
In the reach determination table T2, the presence or absence of reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the portion where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is "0" to "13").

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. Special figure 1
Then, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in Special Figure 1. In special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern random value read out and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in special figure 2 are used as the fluctuation pattern of "P2
Any of "4" to "P31" is selected. Since the fluctuation pattern selected depends on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is "P15" to "P15" in the special figure 1). "P16"
In the special figure 2, the fluctuation patterns “P32” to “P33”) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern random value read out and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2 are used as the fluctuation pattern.
Either "P32" or "P33" is selected. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processes of steps S1604 to S1611 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605 and S16.
It is different from 06, S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, S1605, S16
In 06, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, and S16.
In 18, S1619 and S1621, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 1).
1) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in special figure 1). Is "P41" to "P43"
, And in Special Figure 2, the variation pattern is “P61” or “P62”). From the read fluctuation pattern random value, in Special Figure 1, "P41" to "P" are used as fluctuation patterns.
In any of "43", "P61" or "P62" is selected in the special figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V.
In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion where the fluctuation pattern is "P44" to "P46" in Special Figure 1 and the fluctuation pattern in Special Figure 2). (Part of "P63") is referred to. From the read fluctuation pattern random value
In Special Figure 1, any of "P44" to "P46" is used as the fluctuation pattern, and in Special Figure 2, "P63".
Is selected. Also, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small hit.
In the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11, the portion corresponding to the small hit (the portion of “P74”) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, "P74" is selected as the variation pattern.

Selection of fluctuation pattern as described above (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S
1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621
) Is performed, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630), and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801).
). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). Jackpot flag is OFF
If (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). Small hit flag is OFF
If (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the big hit game and the small hit game are not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the big hit determination and the small hit determination for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 8
1 sets the opening pattern of the winning opening and the V opening / closing member according to the type of the winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71.
The value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member,
Set the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game.
Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). afterwards,
The special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the big hit with the winning small hit rush (step S1811). .. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this process.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES)
), The value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. here,
"10000" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). When "10000" is set in the probability variation counter, the value of the substantial probability variation counter does not become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES),
The value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). What is a time saving counter?
It counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, "10000" is set in the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. Game control microcomputer 81
Determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). When "10000" is set in the time reduction counter, the value of the actual time reduction counter does not become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is a probability change state, a probability change counter value, whether or not it is in a time reduction state, a time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: Y
ES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). Step S2103
In, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. Time saving flag is O
In the case of N (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state.
Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later.
After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 8
In step 1, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2203). As a condition for opening the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not there is a ball in the big winning opening opening start opening 17. If there is no entry into the opening opening opening 17 of the large winning opening, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied. Large winning opening opening opening opening 1
When the ball is entered in 7, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening. The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening of the big winning opening is temporarily closed after opening, the big winning opening is opened again. Interval time (
This includes the time when the closing time) has passed and the time to start opening again is reached. If the above conditions are not satisfied (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When the above conditions are satisfied (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208).
.. The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command
This process is finished.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied.
Then, if the closing condition of the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. When the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 8
1 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" is set to "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing schedule". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R)"
It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, set the jackpot end flag to ON (step S2229).
This process is finished.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2).
200: YES) Since the final round has been completed, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ending time of the jackpot has elapsed (step S2230). When the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 8
1 completes this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S223).
0: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2322), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. afterwards,
The game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

Further, in the special electric accessory processing, as described above, the big winning opening (first) in the big hit game.
In addition to the opening process of the large winning opening 30 or the second large winning opening 35), the opening processing of the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) in the small hit game is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small hit flag is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 has a big winning opening (FIG. 13) according to an opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit with a winning small hit rush. The second large winning opening 35) is opened, and then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening (Fig. 13) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied, the closing condition is satisfied. Closed the big prize opening (
Block) (end of small hit game). After that, the small hit flag is turned off and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round.
The round corresponds to the open round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. V opening / closing member 71 in the round
This is because it is not necessary to operate.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502).
). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first winning ball has been won in the first winning opening 30 in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502:
YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S).
2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. There is no prize in the first prize opening 30 in the round, and the V opening / closing member 71
This is because it is not necessary to operate.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 8
In No. 1, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened, and the V validity period setting process is performed (1).
Step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether the V opening / closing member 71 is "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. V region 7
It is configured to pass 0. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), and the V-opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And set the V validity period to 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid" means
This means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a (see the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described later). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is,
Here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is not turned ON when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is supposed to be. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is,
The game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (game state setting process described later (FIG. 32).
)reference). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second prize flag is ON (
Step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 8
In step 1, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time, and the V validity period setting process is performed (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), the second ball is generally won. The time from time to the end of the round is 31.5
It will be shorter than seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 is V.
The V valid period is set while the opening / closing member 71 is open, and the V invalid period is set together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2).
524), the process proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2).
551), V opening / closing member closing process and V invalid period setting process are performed (step S255).
2). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 is a V opening / closing member 7.
1 is forcibly closed, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have passed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed,
Set to the V invalid period and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is, for example, V in the case of short opening.
For example, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening / closing member 71 is opened. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S)
2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301
When the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the probability variation flag ON (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "10000" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF. (Step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "10000" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.
In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost a jackpot before the 10000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the jackpot scheduled to pass V (special symbol stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is the jackpot game. If V is passed inside, the gaming state after the big hit will be a high accuracy and high base state until the next big hit, and it is almost guaranteed that the small hit rush will occur.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V validity period is the V opening / closing member operation processing (FIG. 3).
This is the period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of 1). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball number processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701).
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. Production control microcomputer 91
Reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "".
It is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (
Step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt processing (step S40)
35) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is performed by the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle.
It is executed based on the interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305).
.. The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute the specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the reception command analysis process and the like in the sub RAM.
Various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of 94 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the main display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 1 that has received various commands
06 executes a sound effect that outputs sound from the speaker 67 in response to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S44)
15: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped.
The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). When receiving (step S444)
5: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S445)
5: YES), the variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it is not received (step S44)
55: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S446)
5: YES), the variable effect end process is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. When the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO)
, The above-mentioned variable effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4
475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480).
). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected.
Sub-RAM for the opening effect start command to start the selected opening effect
It is set in the effect command set area 94b of 94. The opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is a command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S43).
When transmitted to the image control board 100 in 15), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100
Reads a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4
485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490).
The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b.
When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4
495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500).
). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94.
When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 outputs a predetermined ending effect image to the ROM 10.
Read from 3 and display on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545).
.. In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state or not, whether it is a time saving state, or not, a probability change). The counter, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-passing command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-passing information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.).
This process ends.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4).
601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is described in step S4, which will be described later.
Selected at 604. FIG. 39 (A) shows the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG.
"P73" is stored in the first to third storage areas, and a state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in Special FIG. 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth reserved in FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the preliminary judgment information, the jackpot judgment information "big hit" and the jackpot type information "2"
1H ”and the fluctuation pattern information“ P61 ”are stored. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas on hold in Special Figure 2 and the areas corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C)
Shows the state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The pre-determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602).
.. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. When the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES)
) Ends this process. That is, the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the first 1st
4 When the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the storage areas, the look-ahead effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 has a "big hit" as the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command.
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "loss without reach", the effect control microcomputer 91 has (step S4).
603: NO), this process is terminated. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4).
604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. FIG. 40
Then, when the pre-judgment result is "big hit" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 55", the look-ahead effect is "none", and when the look-ahead effect random value is "56 to 67", the look-ahead effect is "
When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "Loss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". This will
The look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S46).
05: NO), the process is terminated.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5).
000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the main display device 7, display of a predetermined character and its operation, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 9
The core effect pattern is determined with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in 3.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing an SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing an SP2 effect, and S
Multiple types of core production patterns for P3 production, multiple types of core production patterns for SP4 production, and multiple types of core production patterns for SP5 production (dedicated reach production pattern for pseudo jackpot suggestion production, which will be described later). , A plurality of types of core production patterns for performing a reachless loss effect and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a small hit effect are set. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P74", the core effect pattern for performing the small hit effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows
The chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1" to "P16" is shown. In the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, the fluctuation patterns are "P21" to "P34", "P41" to "P56".
The portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed in the cases of "P61" to "P74" may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, “2-NO”, “2-SP1”, and “2-S” are used as chance-up effect patterns.
P2, "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-
"NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and sets the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 issues a variation effect start command to the sub-RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5015 is realized.
Set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of (step S5020).
.. When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S503).
0), this process is terminated. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, the fluctuation pattern is "
At the time of "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305).
The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is in progress (step S4701).
.. Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of the variation in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

When it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO
), Finish this process. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of the fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the advance notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the advance notice fade effect for fading the advance notice image.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) based on FIG. 45.
The operation of is described. The buffer and the like that appear in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). When receiving (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5001: YES).
Step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, and Rs the predetermined variation effect image instructed by the variation effect start command.
It is read from the OM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If receiving (step 5)
003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command before the end of the fluctuation, and when the command before the end of the fluctuation includes the look-ahead effect pattern information, reads a predetermined look-ahead effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the main display device. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.
Even if the pre-variation command does not include pre-reading effect pattern information
If the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the notice fade effect for fading the notice image is performed. On the other hand, when it is not received (step S5003)
: NO), skip the above process.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When receiving (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 stops and displays the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed.
A variable effect stop display is performed, which is read from the OM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 (step S5006). On the other hand, when it is not received (step S500)
5: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007).
). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and reads the predetermined opening effect image specified in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the main display device 7. Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is terminated.

9. Operation of the panel movable body and the sub-display device 10 Using FIGS. 46 to 59, the panel movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) and the second movable accessory 15
The operation of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, a left sub-display device 10L, and a left sub-display device 10L during a game effect (display effect) or in an initial operation when the power is turned on.
Drive control is performed to operate the right sub-display device 10R. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91
Performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the main display device 7 or the sub display device 10 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on.

The operation of the left sub-display device 10L will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG. 46 shows
It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L. FIG. 47 shows the left sub-display device 1.
It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the right rotation of 0L. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the left sub-display device 10L. The left sub-display device 10L is provided with a rectangular display screen, and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate left and right. The left sub-display device 10L is located at the retracted position shown in FIG.
It can be stationary at the home position) (first aspect). At this time, the left sub-display device 1
0L is located in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and a part of the lower left is difficult for the player to see. The left sub-display device 10L moves (advances) upward from the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and moves upward (advanced) in FIG. 46.
When it moves to the relay position shown in FIG. 47, it rotates clockwise from that position as shown in FIG. 47.
It can move to the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 48 and stand still there (second aspect). In this second aspect, the left sub-display device 10L stops so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the main display device 7. The left sub-display device 10L is configured to change the orientation of the display screen by 90 degrees between the retracted position in FIG. 1 and the advanced position in FIG. 48. The left sub-display device 10L can be moved (evacuated) from the advanced position of FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the states of FIGS. 47 and 46, and is stationary there. Can be done.

The operation of the right sub-display device 10R will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 shows
It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 50 shows the right sub-display device 1.
It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the left rotation of 0R. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the right sub-display device 10R. Like the left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R has a rectangular display screen, and moves up and down and rotates left and right so that the movement mode (movement locus) is line-symmetrical with the left sub display device 10L. Is configured to be possible. The right sub-display device 10R can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first aspect). At this time, the right sub-display device 10R is located in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and it is difficult for the player to see a part of the lower right. When the right sub-display device 10R moves (advances) upward from the retracted position of FIG. 1 and moves to the relay position (relay position) shown in FIG. 49, the right sub-display device 10R moves from that position to FIG.
As shown in 0, it can be rotated counterclockwise, moved to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 51, and stopped there (second aspect). In this second aspect, the right sub-display device 10R
Stops on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.
Here, the advance position of the right sub display device 10R and the advance position of the left sub display device 10L are the same position. However, these advance positions may be different. For example, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R may be adjacent to each other near the center of the display screen 7a when they are in the advanced positions. The right sub-display device 10R is configured so that the orientation of the display screen changes by 90 degrees between the retracted position in FIG. 1 and the advanced position in FIG. The right sub-display device 10R
By moving (evacuating) from the advance position of FIG. 51 so as to pass through the states of FIGS. 50 and 49, it is possible to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 and to stand still there.

As shown in FIG. 52, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R can each move upward (relay position) in parallel. Moreover, it is possible to stop at this relay position.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. 53 shows the first
It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement (advance movement) of the movable accessory 14 in the advance direction. FIG. 54 shows the first
It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the movable accessory 14. FIG. 55 is an explanatory view illustrating the rotational operation of the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. 53, the first movable accessory 14 is the left movable accessory 1.
It includes 4L and the right movable accessory 14R. Left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R
Each is configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of the decorative part (left side decorative part and right side decorative part) with a smiley face drawn on the tip side is attached. The first movable accessory 14 is shown in FIG.
As shown in the above, the left movable accessory 14L can be stationary at the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory 14R can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). .. At this time, a part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can be visually recognized. In the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. 53, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) from the state of FIG. By doing so, at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 54, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united to form one decorative member (rotating body) (second aspect). In this second aspect, the rotating body in which the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united is the main display device 7.
Stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the rotating body can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise (rotate clockwise in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at an arbitrary tilted angle. The first movable accessory 14 can move (evacuate) from the advance position shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the state shown in FIG. be able to.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 shows the second
It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the movable accessory 15. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable and left and right rotationally movable. The second movable accessory 15 is
As shown in FIG. 1, it is possible to stand still at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 56 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 57, this decorative portion is
In front of the display screen 7a, it can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise (rotate clockwise in the figure), and can stop at an arbitrary tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 58, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can both perform the first combination effect by being in the second mode. That is, when both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advance position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary in a partially overlapped and combined state.
Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are the second movable accessory 15.
Covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15
It is possible to perform a second combination effect in which and tilt at the same angle. In this second combination effect, after the first combination effect, two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilting) together, and each of them moves to the advance position in a tilted state and overlaps with each other. In some cases, the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the first combination effect.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of this embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of this embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The sub-display device interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. This sub-display device interlocking effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern (for example, during a pseudo-continuous effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub display device interlocking effect, the RO
The corresponding image data is read from M103, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 or the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub display device interlocking effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R ) Change the position and inclination.

[Sub-display device interlocking effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect A. In the sub-display device interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. The specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 is a smiley face image.
The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 60B to 60C, the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in the lower left direction, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves. Moves to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 60B, the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 60C, the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 disappears.
The specific image TG2 is newly displayed. The specific image TG2 is an image showing the appearance of a specific object, and here, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiley face image. The specific image TG2 is a larger image than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in the area above the right sub-display device 10R in the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 may be the one in which the specific image TG1 is enlarged and moved while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the retracted position (home position) to the upper relay position (relay position). Stand still (stop) at the relay position. The specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) at the relay position.
) Partially covered. In other words, the sub display device 10 stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. That is, the specific image TG2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), a reduction effect of reducing the specific image TG2 is executed.
Here, the specific image TG2 straddles the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 and is reduced and moved downward while maintaining the display, and as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the specific image TG2
Is displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the relay position (relay position) to the lower retract position (home position). It stands still (stops) at the retracted position. At this time, the specific image TG 2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the specific image TG2 moves upward in the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) when the sub display device 10 is moving downward. After that, in the specific image TG2, the portion protruding from the upper side of the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, the specific image TG2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 60 (G) to 60 (I), the specific image TG2 does not change its relative position with respect to the main display device 7, and the entire sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10) is used. From the state displayed on 10R), the whole is the main display device 7
It can be switched to the state displayed in. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (J), the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 1) is newly displayed in the state where the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7.
The specific image TG3 is displayed in 0R). The specific image TG3 is an image showing the appearance of a specific object, and here, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiley face image.

[Sub-display device interlocking effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect B. FIGS. 61 (A) to 61 (C) of the sub-display device interlocking effect B are FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (C) of the sub-display device interlocking effect A.
Same as C). That is, in the sub-display device interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). ing. The specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific object. here,
The specific image TG1 is a smiley face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61B to 61C, the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in the lower left direction, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves. Moves to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61B, the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 disappears.
The specific image TG2 is newly displayed. The specific image TG2 is an image showing the appearance of a specific object, and here, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiley face image. The specific image TG2 is a larger image than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in an area near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, specific image TG
Reference numeral 2 denotes a specific image TG1 which may be moved while maintaining the display while being enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61 (E) to 61 (F), the right sub-display device 10R is set to the retracted position (
By moving upward from the home position) and rotating counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position), it moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stands still (stops) there. The specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the right sub display device 10R is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R).
In other words, the sub display device 10 has the specific image TG displayed on the main display device 7.
Of 2, the image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed. That is, the specific image TG2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), a reduction effect of reducing the specific image TG2 is executed.
Here, the specific image TG2 is reduced while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 while maintaining the display, and the entire specific image TG2 is reduced to the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R).
Is displayed in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the right sub-display device 10R moves from the advance position (deployment position) to the retracted position (home position) by rotating clockwise and downward, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the specific image TG 2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the specific image TG2 moves toward the left side in the right sub-display device 10R when the right sub-display device 10R is rotating clockwise. After that, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the right sub-display device 1.
The portion protruding from the left side of 0R is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, the specific image TG2 is gradually displayed in a state of being displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.
The portion displayed on the main display device 7 increases. As a result, the specific image TG2 is shown in FIG.
As shown in 1 (G) to 61 (I), the entire main display device 7 is displayed from the state in which the entire display is displayed on the right sub display device 10R without changing the relative position with respect to the main display device 7. It can be switched to the state displayed in. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the specific image TG3 is newly displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) in a state where the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7. The specific image TG3 is an image showing the appearance of a specific object, and here, like the specific image TG1, it is a smiley face image.

[Sub-display device interlocking effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect C. In the sub-display device interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative symbol forms a reach, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol is displayed. 8C
Is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62 (B) to 62 (C), the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative symbol 8Z1 is an image of a symbol (number) that becomes a big hit when stopped as a middle decorative symbol in the reach effect, and is the same symbol (number) as the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. Here, it is "5". This decorative pattern 8Z1 also corresponds to a specific image because it represents a number as a specific object. Decorative pattern 8Z1
It moves in the lower left direction and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62B, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.
Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 1
At 0, an image of a portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62C, the entire decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 disappears.
Is displayed in. The decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is larger than that displayed on the right sub display device 10R. Here, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed in an area near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative symbol 8Z1 may be moved while being enlarged while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62 (E) to 62 (F), the left sub-display device 10L is set to the retracted position (
By moving upward from the home position) and rotating clockwise at the relay position (relay position), it moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stands still (stops) there. The decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub display device 10L is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative symbol 8Z1 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L).
In other words, the sub display device 10 has the decorative symbol 8Z displayed on the main display device 7.
The image corresponding to the portion of 1 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), a reduction effect of reducing the decorative symbol 8Z1 is executed.
Here, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is reduced while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 while maintaining the display, and the entire decorative symbol 8Z1 is the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L).
Is displayed in. At this time, the effect image E, which is a light emitting image, is around the decorative pattern 8Z1.
F is displayed. The effect image EF is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF suggests that "5" of the decorative symbol 8Z1 is confirmed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployment position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z1 moves toward the right side in the left sub display device 10L when the left sub display device 10L is rotating counterclockwise. After that, the decorative design 8Z1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 1.
The portion protruding from the right side of 0L is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is gradually displayed in a state of being displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.
The portion displayed on the main display device 7 increases. As a result, the decorative pattern 8Z1 becomes FIG.
As shown in 2 (G) to 62 (I), the entire main display device 7 is displayed from the state in which the entire display is displayed on the left sub display device 10L without changing the relative position with respect to the main display device 7. It can be switched to the state displayed in. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), "5, 5, 5" are confirmed (stopped) as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the main display device 7. , The left decorative symbol 8ZL, the middle decorative symbol 8ZC, and the right decorative symbol 8ZR are fixedly displayed (stopped display) on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R and left sub display device 10L). The decorative symbol 8ZL, the intermediate decorative symbol 8ZC, and the right decorative symbol 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are confirmed and displayed almost at the same time. To.

[Sub-display device interlocking effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect D. In the sub-display device interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative symbol forms a reach, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol is displayed. 8C
Is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 1
A plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed across both of the display screens of 0. Decorative pattern 8Z1
In the reach effect, it is an image of a symbol (number) that becomes a big hit when stopped as a middle decorative symbol, and is the same symbol (number) as the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. here,
It is "5". This decorative pattern 8Z1 also corresponds to a specific image because it represents a number as a specific object. The plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed side by side in an annular shape, and each of them moves along an annular trajectory. Here, it is moving clockwise. A part of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a ring shape is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative symbol 8Z1 located at the lower right moves in the lower left direction, and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 63B, the decorative symbol 8Z1 is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. here,
The sub-display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub-display device 10 displays an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub-display device 10. Similarly, the decorative symbol 8Z1 located below moves to the left and moves from the display screen of the right sub display device 10R to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The decorative symbol 8Z1 located at the lower left moves in the upper left direction, and moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, the display of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 disappears, and as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the entire decorative symbol 8Z2 is newly displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the decorative symbol 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is enlarged and displayed while maintaining the display. The display of the decorative symbol 8Z2 may disappear once, and then the enlarged decorative symbol 8Z2 may be redisplayed. In addition, decorative pattern 8
Z2 may be one in which one of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 is moved.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63 (E) to 63 (F), the left sub-display device 10L is set to the retracted position (
By moving upward from the home position) and rotating clockwise at the relay position (relay position), it moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stands still (stops) there. The decorative symbol 8Z2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub display device 10L is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) stands still (stops) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative symbol 8Z2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L).
In other words, the sub display device 10 has the decorative symbol 8Z displayed on the main display device 7.
Of 2, the image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), a reduction effect of reducing the decorative symbol 8Z2 is executed.
Here, the decorative symbol 8Z2 is reduced while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 while maintaining the display, and the entire decorative symbol 8Z2 is the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L).
Is displayed in. At this time, the effect image E, which is a light emitting image, is around the decorative pattern 8Z2.
F is displayed. The effect image EF is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF suggests that "5" of the decorative symbol 8Z2 is confirmed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed. Further, a plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed side by side in a ring shape on the main display device 7. Each of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 moves along an annular trajectory. Here, it is moving clockwise. A part of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a ring shape is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed so as to surround the decorative symbols 8Z2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployment position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the decorative symbol 8Z2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z2 moves toward the right side in the left sub display device 10L when the left sub display device 10L is rotating counterclockwise. After that, the decorative design 8Z2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 1.
The portion protruding from the right side of 0L is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7. That is, the decorative symbol 8Z2 is gradually displayed in a state of being displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.
The portion displayed on the main display device 7 increases. As a result, the decorative pattern 8Z2 becomes FIG.
As shown in 3 (G) to 63 (I), the entire main display device 7 is displayed from the state in which the entire display is displayed on the left sub display device 10L without changing the relative position with respect to the main display device 7. It can be switched to the state displayed in. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), "5, 5, 5" are confirmed (stopped) as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the main display device 7. , The left decorative symbol 8ZL, the middle decorative symbol 8ZC, and the right decorative symbol 8ZR are fixedly displayed (stopped display) on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R and left sub display device 10L). The decorative symbol 8ZL, the intermediate decorative symbol 8ZC, and the right decorative symbol 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are confirmed and displayed almost at the same time. To.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the sub-display device interlocking effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 60 (D) to 60 (E), a first effect in which the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and a first effect. After that, the sub display device 10 moves from the first position and stands still (stops) at the second position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the specific image TG2 is displayed. Main display device 7
Of the specific image TG2 displayed on the screen, the second effect of displaying the image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 on the sub-display device 10 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. 61 (D) to 61 (F), 62 (D) to 62 (F), 63 (D) to 63.
The same applies to (F).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (E) to 60 (G), after the second effect, the identification displayed across the sub display device 10 and the main display device 7 is specified. A third effect in which the image TG2 is reduced and displayed, and a fourth effect in which the entire reduced specific image TG2 is displayed on the sub-display device 10 after the third effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 (F) to 61 (G), 62 (F) to 62 (G), and 63 (F) to 63 (G).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (G) to 60 (I), the sub-display device 10 moves from the second position to the first position after the fourth effect. At the same time, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the entire reduced specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. 61 (G) to 61 (I), 62 (G) to 62 (I), 63 (G) to
The same applies to FIG. 63 (I).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (B) to 60 (C), when the sub display device 10 is stopped at the first position before the first effect, the sub display device 1 is sub. A sixth effect in which the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display device 10 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. FIGS. 61 (B)
The same applies to FIGS. 61 (C), 62 (B) to 62 (C), and 63 (B).
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 (D) to 61 (F),
The orientation of the sub-display device 10 is different between when the sub-display device 10 is stopped at the first position and when the sub-display device 10 is stopped at the second position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 62 (D) to 62 (F) and 63 (D) to 63 (F).
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, since the specific image is a decorative pattern, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon interlocking effect.
[Modification 1]
In the sub-display device interlocking effect A of FIG. 60, of the sub-display devices 10, the left sub-display device 10
It is assumed that both L and the right sub-display device 10R move upward. However, the configuration may be such that only the right sub-display device 10R moves upward and the left sub-display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 2]
In the sub-display device interlocking effect B of FIG. 61, the right sub-display device 10R is assumed to move.
However, the left sub-display device 10L may be configured to move. In the sub-display device interlocking effect C of FIG. 62 and the sub-display device interlocking effect D of FIG. 63, the left sub-display device 10L is assumed to move. However, the right sub-display device 10R may be configured to move.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the sub-display device interlocking effects A to D of FIGS. 60 to 63 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the sub-display device interlocking effect A of FIG. 60, FIGS. 62 and 6 are used as specific images.
The decorative pattern of 3 may be adopted.

[Modification 5]
In the sub-display device interlocking effect of FIGS. 60 to 63, a part of the described effect may not be provided, or another effect may be added. For example, the sub-display device interlocking effect of FIGS. 60 to 61 may be executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, and the variable display of the decorative symbol may be displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine provided with a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
The first display means is configured to be movable.
A first effect in which a specific image representing a specific target is displayed on the second display means, and
After the first effect, the first display means moves from the first position to cover a part of the second display means on which the specific image is displayed. A second display means that stops at a position and displays an image corresponding to a portion of the specific image displayed on the second display means that is covered by the first display means on the first display means. 2 production and
Is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific image displayed straddling the first display means and the second display means is reduced and displayed.
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the entire reduced specific image is displayed on the first display means can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2.
After the fourth effect, the first display means moves from the second position to the first position, and the second display means displays the entire reduced image. 5th
Can be produced,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
Before the first effect, when the first display means is stopped at the first position, a sixth effect in which the specific image is displayed on the first display means can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4.
The orientation of the first display means is different between when the first display means is stopped at the first position and when the first display means is stopped at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5.
The specific image is a decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. This decorative symbol variation stop effect can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation stop effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect A. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9
A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach production,
Decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. This reach display is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 1.
It is displayed straddling 0L and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the loss display effect 1 is performed. In this loss display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 6 symbols in the reach display, and the loss symbol is displayed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at doublet, the jackpot symbol is obtained, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at other than doublet, the symbol is lost. This lost symbol is displayed straddling the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the loss display effect 2 is performed. In this loss display effect 2, the loss symbol is moved to the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a and displayed. At this time, the lost symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This lost pattern Z
A1 is "7 6 7" in the same manner as the lost symbols shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect B. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9
A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach production,
Decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. This reach display is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 1.
It is displayed straddling 0L and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the deployed position, moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is the left sub. This is an effect displayed on the display device 10L. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the loss display effect 1 is performed. In this loss display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 6 symbols in the reach display, and the loss symbol is displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at doublet, the jackpot symbol is obtained, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at other than doublet, the symbol is lost. This lost pattern is
It is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the loss display effect 2 is performed. In this loss display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the deployed position to the home position, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all the lost symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lost symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This lost pattern ZA1 is a decorative pattern 8L, 8C.
, 8R is the same as the lost pattern, which is "7 6 7".

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect C. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9
A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach production,
Decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and reach display is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. This reach display is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 1.
It is displayed straddling 0L and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the deployed position, moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is the left sub. This is an effect displayed on the display device 10L. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is performed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 7 symbols in the reach display, and the jackpot symbol is displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at doublet, the jackpot symbol is obtained, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at other than doublet, the symbol is lost. This jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is performed. In the jackpot display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the deployed position to the home position, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is,
All of the jackpot symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left sub-display device 1
At 0L, the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed. The jackpot symbol ZA2 is "7 7 7" like the jackpot symbols shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect D. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9
A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach production,
The decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and a plurality of other decorative symbols are also displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach display in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is performed. Is done. In this case, the decorative symbols representing the 7 symbols are arranged in a circle and move counterclockwise. As shown in the figure, a plurality of reach lines LN by a plurality of decorative symbols showing 7 symbols.
A reach display is formed in. Further, this reach display is displayed straddling the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. In this reach effect, a predetermined character performs various effects. The reach line LN is a line for temporarily stopping the decorative symbol to display the reach, and in the case of a big hit, the jackpot symbol is arranged on the reach line LN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the deployed position, moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and is a decorative symbol displayed on the display screen 7a during high-speed fluctuation. 8C is an effect displayed on the left sub display device 10L. At this time,
A plurality of decorative symbols showing 7 symbols including decorative symbols 8L and 8R are moving counterclockwise.
Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L is the right sub display device 10R.
Have moved to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is performed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 7 symbols in the reach display, and the jackpot symbol is displayed at a plurality of reach lines LN. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is the left sub-display device 1.
Stop is displayed at 0L. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at doublet, the jackpot symbol is obtained, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at other than doublet, the symbol is lost. This jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is performed. In the jackpot display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the deployed position to the home position, and the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is,
All of the jackpot symbols formed on the plurality of reach lines LN are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. The jackpot symbol ZA2 is "7 7 7" like the jackpot symbols shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
The effect of stopping the change of the decorative symbol is performed in the same change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of fluctuations may be performed.

[Modification example]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, after the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In this case, after the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed on the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R, the lost symbol ZA1 or the symbol ZA2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a.
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, after the left sub display device 10L moves to the front of the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L display the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol. In this case, the display screen 7a moves and the left sub-display device 10L
The lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol may be displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L. Further, both the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L may be moved to display the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects C and D, when the left sub display device is moved, the left sub display device 10L (for example, on the decorative symbol 8C) displays a button image representing the effect button 63 to the player. The effect button 63 may be prompted to be pressed, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Further, the effect button may be displayed on the jackpot symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, a re-lottery effect for changing the jackpot symbol) may be performed by pressing the effect button 63.
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R may be moved when the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed during the reach effect. For example, the moving decorative symbol may be rotated around the decorative symbol 8C. in this case,
When the moving decorative symbol overlaps with the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol ZA2, it may pass behind the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol ZA2.
Further, in the decorative symbol variation stop effect D, when the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed during the reach effect, the decorative symbols on the plurality of reach lines LN may be moved. For example, the moving decorative symbol may be rotated around the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, when the moving decorative symbol overlaps with the jackpot symbol ZA2, it may pass behind the jackpot symbol ZA2.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect.
[Effect 1]
In the above decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, after the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the display screen 7
A lost symbol or a jackpot symbol (a predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol) is displayed by a and the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). According to this configuration, the interest of the display effect of the decorative pattern can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect, the same fluctuation is performed. According to this configuration
An effect in which a decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a lost symbol or a jackpot symbol on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R) (a predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol).
Since you can experience the effect of displaying as a series of effects, you can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects C and D, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). According to this configuration, the interest of the display effect of the jackpot symbol can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects B to D, the display screen 7a is formed when the jackpot symbol is formed.
At least a part of the symbols forming the jackpot symbol displayed on the left sub-display device 10L is moved and displayed. According to this configuration, the interest of the display effect of the jackpot symbol can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect, the same decorative symbol (7 symbols) displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L is displayed before the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, during the reach effect). It is moved and displayed. According to this configuration, the interest of the display effect of the jackpot symbol can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZA-1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
The first display means and the second display means can each execute a plurality of types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern on the first display means.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative symbol in a predetermined stop mode in the first display means and the second display means.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZA-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZA-1.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZA-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZA-1 or the aspect ZA-2.
The predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol in the second display effect is a mode representing a jackpot symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZA-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZA-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which the same symbol as the symbol forming the jackpot symbol in the second display effect is moved and displayed in the first display means and the second display means.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZA-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZA-1 to ZA-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the same decorative symbol is moved and displayed in the first display means and the second display means.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed, the first display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the second display effect is performed after the first display effect. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ When the first jackpot symbol is displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the second jackpot symbol is displayed on either the first display means or the second display means. To.
○ After either one of the first display means or the second display means moves (in front of the other display means), the jackpot symbol is displayed by the first display means and the second display means.
Also, when the moved display means returns to the home position, the second jackpot symbol is displayed.
○ A plurality of jackpot lines are formed by the first display means or the second display means, and a jackpot symbol is displayed on each of them.
○ After displaying the button image on either the first display means or the second display means, the jackpot symbol is displayed by the first display means and the second display means by pushing the button.
○ A plurality of decorative symbols move between the first display means and the second display means. At this time, the plurality of decorative symbols move behind the second jackpot symbol.
○ A button image representing the effect button 63 is displayed on the decorative pattern 8C.

The special variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. This special variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
Analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the special variation effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is sub. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the display device 10. Further, in the special variation effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Special fluctuation production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, the message image "hot zone entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is a production performed during a predetermined period in the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG1, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of linearly moving from the retracted position to the relay position. At this time, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotation movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG2, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of rotating and moving from the relay position to the advance position. At this time, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion production is
The left sub-display device 10L is an effect of finishing the movement and stopping at the advance position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that "5", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is stopped.

[Special fluctuation production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 69A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, the message image "hot zone entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is a production performed during a predetermined period in the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG1, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of linearly moving from the retracted position to the relay position. At this time, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotation movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG2, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of rotating and moving from the relay position to the advance position. At this time, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion production is
The left sub-display device 10L is an effect of finishing the movement and stopping at the advance position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle effect symbol 8C is the effect symbol 8L of the display screen 7a.
, 8R is enlarged and displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle effect symbol 8C
“3” is shown to fluctuate downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle effect symbol 8C is the effect symbol 8L of the display screen 7a.
, 8R is enlarged and displayed. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that "5", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is stopped.

[Special fluctuation production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, the message image "hot zone entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is a production performed during a predetermined period in the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70 (D) to 70 (H), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. In this medium symbol variation effect, the medium effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variablely displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has been moved to the advance position. It is a production to do.

First, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), "3", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while moving downward as shown by the arrow YG1. Next, FIG. 70
As shown in (E), "3", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, moves downward as shown by the arrow YG2, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed across. Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L while moving downward as shown by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, moves downward as shown by the arrow YG4, and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the main display device 7 It is displayed across the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display screen 7 while moving downward as shown by YG5.

[Special fluctuation production D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIGS. 71 (C) and 71 (D), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This medium symbol variation effect is an effect of variablely displaying the medium effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, it is shown that "3", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, moves downward as shown by the arrow YG2. At this time, the left sub display device 10L is in the retracted position, and the middle effect symbol 8C is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, the final stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 71 (E) is executed. This fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a.
Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "5", and the middle effect symbol 8
An example in which C is "4" is shown.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the special fluctuation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variation display of the middle effect symbol 8C among the variation displays of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the left sub display device 1.
This can be done on the 0L display screen (FIGS. 68 (G), 69 (G), 70 (D).
) ~ (H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L is moved so as to overlap the middle effect symbol 8C that is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 68 (D), (E), (F), and FIG. 69 (D). ) (E)
(F)), the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is performed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIGS. 68 (G), 69 (G), 70 (D) to (H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one row of the three rows of effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variablely displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the production symbols in a specific row, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the middle symbol variation effect, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and straddles the display screen 7a and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Is displayed, and is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Left sub-display device 1
After being displayed on the 0L display screen, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10.
It is displayed straddling the display screen of L, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the execution of the zone entry effect is triggered (FIG. 68 (C), FIG. 69).
(C), FIG. 70 (C)), the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is performed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a wide range to the zone production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the medium effect symbol 8C displayed on the left sub display device 10L can be displayed larger than the effect symbols 8L and 8R of the display device 7a (FIG. 69 (G)).
(H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the special variation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect using the left sub display device 10L has been used, but in addition to or instead of the left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R may be used to display the middle effect symbol 8C. ..
[Modification 2]
In the above, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, but two or more rows of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. It may be displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
[Modification 3]
In the above, when the zone entry effect is executed (FIG. 68 (C), FIG. 69 (C), FIG. 70 (C).
)) The configuration was such that the left sub display device 10L was used to display the variation of the middle effect symbol 8C, but when the zone entry effect was executed, the variation display of the middle effect symbol 8C using the left sub display device 10L was performed. This may be branched into the case where the left sub-display device 10L is used and the case where the variation display of the middle effect symbol 8C using the left sub-display device 10L is not performed (FIG. 71).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
The first display device that can display the variable display of the production pattern and
A gaming machine provided with a second display device different from the first display device.
It is characterized in that the variation display of the effect symbols in a predetermined row among the variation displays of the effect symbols performed on the display screen of the first display device can be performed on the display screen of the second display device. Game machine.

[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1.
The second display device is a gaming machine characterized in that it moves so as to overlap with the effect symbols in the predetermined row of the first display device, and displays a variable display of the effect symbols of the predetermined example.

[Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect symbol in the predetermined row is an effect symbol in any one row of the effect symbols in a plurality of rows.

[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
The effect symbols in the predetermined row are displayed on one of the display screens of the first display device and the second display device during the fluctuation, and then straddle the display screens of the first display device and the second display device. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on the other display screen.

[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific effect is executed, a variable display of the effect symbols in the predetermined row is performed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the second display device is larger than the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that even when the specific effect is executed, the variation display of the effect symbols in the predetermined row may not be performed on the display screen of the second display device.

The character display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. This character display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18
Is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R.
These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In the character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a friendly character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the character display effect 2 is performed. In this character display effect 2, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L and then moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the character display effect 3 is performed. In the character display effect 3, the character CRA is displayed by returning to the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, a reach production is performed.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R.
These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In the character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a friendly character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73C, the character display effect 2 is performed. In the character display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (the place where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the display screen 7
This is an effect in which the character CRA displayed in a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
The hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L is the right sub display device 10R.
Have moved to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the character display effect 3 is performed. In the character display effect 3, the left sub display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, and the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, a reach production is performed.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect C.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R.
These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In the character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a friendly character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the character display effect 2 is performed. In the character display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (the place where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the display screen 7
The character CRA displayed in a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. Further, in the character display effect 2, the character focus image ZB1 is displayed on the illumination panel 18.
Is displayed. This character focus image ZB1 is an image for emphasizing the character CRA, which is displayed in a portion other than the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L, and represents, for example, a plurality of speed lines from the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L. It is an image that represents a predetermined emblem or the like. The character focus image ZB1 may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 in a portion of the left sub-display device 10L excluding the character CRA. Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has been moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the character display effect 3 is performed. In this character display effect 3, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a, and the character focus image ZB1 of the illumination panel 18 is erased to that portion. Is transparent. The hold icon 9A is displayed by returning to the left sub-display device 10L again.
After this, a reach production is performed.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect D.
In the character display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R.
These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In the character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a friendly character.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75 (C) and 75 (D), the character display effect 2 and the character display effect 3 are performed. That is, in the character display effects 2 and 3, the left sub display device 10L
Is driven toward the expansion position (near the center of the display screen 7a on which the character CRA is displayed), and when it reaches the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, while gradually hiding the character CRA on the display screen 7a, The image corresponding to the hidden part of the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the character display effect 4 is performed. In the character display effect 4, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (the place where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the display screen 7
The character CRA displayed in a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. Further, in the character display effect 2, the character focus image ZB1 is displayed on the illumination panel 18.
Is displayed. This character focus image ZB1 is an image for emphasizing the character CRA, which is displayed in a portion other than the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L, and represents, for example, a plurality of speed lines from the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L. It is an image that represents a predetermined emblem or the like. The character focus image ZB1 may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 in a portion of the left sub-display device 10L excluding the character CRA. Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has been moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the character display effect 5 is performed. In this character display effect 5, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the deployed position to the home position, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a, and the character focus image ZB1 of the illumination panel 18 is erased to that portion. Is transparent. The hold icon 9A is displayed by returning to the left sub-display device 10L again.
After this, a reach production is performed.

[Modification example]
In the character display effects C and D, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L has the character C.
Characters CRA are displayed in order from the area on the front side of RA. On the other hand, when the left sub-display device 10L hides all the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a,
The character CRA may be displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

The character display effect is performed with the same variation. However, the variation is not limited to this, and may be performed with different variations.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the character display effect, after the character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). According to this configuration, the interest of the character display effect can be improved by using the two display devices, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above character display effect, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the left sub display device 10L is located in front of the center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a on the left sub display device 10L. The character CRA is displayed at a position corresponding to the displayed character CRA. According to this configuration, the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it has been moved to the left sub-display device 10L located in front of the display screen 7a, so that a three-dimensional display effect can be obtained. Is possible. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above character display effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the unfolded position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display device 10L is in the unfolded position, and the display screen is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. Character C displayed on 7a
The character CRA is displayed at the position corresponding to RA. According to this configuration, as the left sub-display device 10L moves, the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it has moved to the left sub-display device 10L located in front of the display screen 7a. It is possible to create a dynamic and three-dimensional display effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the character display effect, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the deployed position, the left sub-display device 10L rotates (moves to the right) with respect to a predetermined axis (see FIG. 47). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a display effect with a more dynamic and three-dimensional effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the character display effects C and D, the character CRA is displayed by moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub display device 10L, and in that case, the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L (left sub display device) on the illumination panel 18. Character CRA displayed on 10L
The character focus image ZB1 which is an image different from the character CRA is displayed in a portion different from the portion corresponding to). According to this configuration, the presence of the character CRA can be enhanced, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a more dynamic and three-dimensional effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZB-1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
The first display means and the second display means can each execute a plurality of types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the first display means.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the predetermined image on the second display means.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZB-1.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the predetermined image is displayed at the first position of the first display means, and in the second display effect, the second display means is the second display means. A third position corresponding to the first position of the first display means in the second display means in a state of being in a second position which is a position in front of the first position of the display means 1. Display the predetermined image at the position,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZB-2.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the second display means moves from the state where the second display means is in the fourth position to the second position, and the second display means moves to the second position. In a certain state, the predetermined image is displayed at the third position in the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZB-3.
In the combination effect, when the second display means moves to the second position in the second display effect, the second display means rotates and moves with respect to a predetermined axis.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZB-3 or the aspect ZB-4.
A third display means different from the first display means and the second display means is provided.
The third display means is arranged in front of the first display means and the second display means.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is the second display effect in the third display means when the predetermined image is displayed at the third position of the second display means in the second display effect. An image different from the predetermined image is displayed in a portion different from the portion corresponding to the predetermined image displayed on the display means of the above.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ When the second display means moves to the position of the predetermined image of the first display means, the predetermined image is sequentially displayed from the area in front of the predetermined image.
○ Predetermined images are sequentially displayed in the second display means, and finally all predetermined images are displayed.

The selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. This selection effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the selection effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the above and the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the selection effect, the position of the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R). And change the tilt.

[Selection production A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect A. In the selection effect A, first, FIG. 76 (A)
), The sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative symbol forms a reach, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol is displayed. 8C is displayed in a variable manner. Here, a selection effect of selecting one symbol from the candidates of a plurality of symbols (numbers) finally selected as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment,
An example is an effect in which one symbol is selected from the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5". The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIG. 76 of this embodiment (
A) to FIG. 76 (F) suggest that a selection effect in which one of the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5" is selected is started, and the selection effect start effect is started. Corresponds to. And
FIG. 76 (H) notifies that the symbol “4” has been selected from the three types of symbols “3”, “4”, and “5”, and corresponds to the selection decision effect. FIGS. 76 (I) to 76 (J) notify that the symbol "5" has been selected from the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5", which is also used for the selection decision effect. Applicable.

In FIG. 76A, the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 representing “3” is temporarily stopped and displayed at the position where the intermediate decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIGS. 76 (B) to 76 (C), the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 representing “4” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 It overlaps with and a temporary stop is displayed. The second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 displayed here is larger than the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 and is larger than the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1.
When 2 overlaps the front of the first middle decorative symbol 8C1, the first middle decorative symbol 8C1 becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76 (D) to 76 (E), the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing "5" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 Overlaps on. The third intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 displayed here is larger than the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1, and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 overlaps the front of the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2, so that the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2
Becomes difficult to see. After that, the first representing "3" larger than the third middle decorative symbol 8C3.
The intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C1
Cover 3. Next, the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2, which is larger than the first intermediate decorative symbol 8C1, is displayed on the display screen 7.
It moves from the upper side to the lower side of a and covers the first middle decorative symbol 8C1. In this way, the effect of covering the intermediate decorative pattern in which the large intermediate decorative symbols are currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the effect speed is increased, and as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the replacement of the intermediate decorative symbols is visually recognized. Difficult high-speed production display is made. In the production of FIGS. 76 (A) to 76 (F), three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5" are displayed one by one in order, and one of these symbols is selected. It is possible to notify the player that the production will be started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8
The display of R disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation validity period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including the characters "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one of the three types of symbols "3", "4", and "5" is selected and determined. Here, in the selection decision, the selected symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped or fixed stop) at the display position of the intermediate decorative symbol to notify the player of the selected symbol.

In FIG. 76 (H), the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 representing “4” is stopped, and three types of symbols “3” are stopped.
It notifies that the symbol "4" is selected from "4" and "5". In FIG. 76 (J), the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing “5” is stopped, and it is notified that the symbol “5” is selected from the three types of symbols “3”, “4”, and “5”. ing. As shown in FIG. 76 (H), the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 representing “4” is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 on which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. (Stop display) is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing “5” is displayed (stop display) on the right sub display device 10R of the advance position (expanded position) covering the predetermined position of the display screen 7a. ). Specifically, when the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing "5" is stopped, the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as shown in FIG. 76 (I). At the same time, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and stop (stop) there. The advance position (deployment position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3, which is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, is partially covered when the right sub display device 10R is moved to the advanced position.
In other words, the right sub-display device 10R is the third middle decorative symbol 8C of the main display device 7.
Rest (stop) at a position that covers a part of the part where 3 is displayed. At this time, a part of the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In other words, the right sub-display device 10R displays an image corresponding to the portion of the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the right sub-display device 10R. That is, the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10R, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases. The second medium decorative symbol 8C2 and the third medium decorative symbol 8C3 are the main display devices 7.
Is displayed at almost the same position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the right sub-display device 1 of the advance position (deployment position)
The entire third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed on 0R. In FIG. 76 (I), the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the right sub display device 10
The mode may be displayed on the right sub-display device 10R for the first time when R is located at the advanced position (deployed position). In this way, the image finally selected as the intermediate decorative pattern 8C (
By changing the display device according to the type (number) of the symbol), it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected, and it is possible to improve the interest. here,
Right sub-display device 1 when the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 representing the jackpot "5" is selected.
Since it is displayed at 0R, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player.

[Selection effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect B. In the selection effect B, first, FIG. 77 (A).
), The sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selection effect B is executed during the variation effect. Here, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol, a selection effect of selecting one image from a plurality of images showing the jackpot lottery result for the variation is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents.
In this embodiment, an effect in which one image is selected from three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "reach" is illustrated. Here, after the selection effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or stopped and displayed so as to have a result corresponding to the selected image. In other words, "missing" in the selection production
When the image of is selected, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode (for example, "456"). When the "big hit" image is selected in the selection effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode (for example, "777"). When the "reach" image is selected in the selection effect, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the reach mode (for example, "5 ↓ 5"). In other words, after the selection effect, the effect (big hit display, loss display, reach display) corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIG. 7 of this embodiment
7 (A) to 77 (F) suggest that a selection effect in which one image is selected from the three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "reach" is started, and the selection effect is started. Corresponds to the start production. Then, FIG. 77 (H) notifies that "miss" is selected from the three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "reach", and corresponds to the selection decision effect. FIG. 77
(I)-Fig. 77 (J) shows "Loss", "Big hit", and "Reach" from the three types of images.
It notifies that "big hit" has been selected, and this also corresponds to the selection decision effect.

In FIG. 77 (A), the first image SG showing “loss” on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
1 is displayed. Next, as shown in FIGS. 77 (B) to 77 (C), the second image SG2 representing the "big hit" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, overlaps with the first image SG1 and stops. Is displayed. The second image SG2 displayed here is an image having the same size and shape as the first image SG1, and the first image SG1 is difficult to see because the second image SG2 overlaps in front of the first image SG1. Become in a state.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77 (D) to 77 (E), the third image SG3 representing “reach” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second image SG2. The third image SG3 displayed here is an image having the same size and shape as the second image SG2, and is the third image SG.
When 3 overlaps the front of the second image SG2, the second image SG2 becomes difficult to see. After that, the first image SG1 having the same size and shape as the third image SG3 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the third image SG3. Next, the second image SG2 is displayed on the display screen 7.
It moves from the upper side to the lower side of a and covers the first image SG1. In this way, the effect of covering the images in which the first to third images are currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the effect speed becomes faster, and as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the high-speed effect in which it is difficult to visually replace the images. Display SG is made. In the production of FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (F), three types of images "loss" and "big hit"
The "reach" is displayed one by one in order, and it is possible to notify the player that the selection effect in which one image is selected from these is started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. Button image B
The TN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation validity period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including the characters "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one image is selected and determined from the three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "reach". Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 77 (H), the first image SG1 representing “loss” is stopped, and it is notified that “loss” is selected from the three types of images “loss”, “big hit”, and “reach”. Figure 7
In 7 (J), the second image SG2 representing the "big hit" stops, and the three types of images "miss" and ""
It informs that "big hit" is selected from "big hit" and "reach". FIG. 77
As shown in (H), the first image SG1 representing “loss” is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), the second image SG2 representing the "big hit" is displayed (stopped) on the right sub-display device 10R of the relay position (relay position) covering the predetermined position of the display screen 7a. To. Specifically, when the second image SG2 representing the "big hit" is stopped, as shown in FIG. 77 (I), the second image SG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the sub display is displayed. Device 10 (left sub-display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) move from the retracted position (home position) to the upper relay position (relay position), and stand still (stop) at the relay position. The relay position (relay position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The second image SG2, which is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, is partially covered by the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) at the relay position. In other words, the sub display device 1
0 is stationary (stopped) at a position of the main display device 7 that covers a part of the portion where the second image SG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the second image SG2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the second image SG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub-display device 10. That is, in the state where the second image SG2 is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases. First image SG1 and second image SG2
Is displayed at substantially the same position with respect to the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), the right sub-display device 1 of the relay position (relay position)
The entire second image SG2 is displayed on 0R. In addition, in FIG. 77 (I), the second image SG
Reference numeral 2 denotes a mode in which the display is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and is displayed on the right sub display device 10R only when the right sub display device 10R is located at the relay position (relay position). In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image finally selected as the jackpot lottery result, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected, and to improve the interest. be able to. Here, when the second image SG2 representing the “big hit” is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that the player can be given a special feeling.

[Selection effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect C. In the selection effect C, first, FIG. 78 (A)
), The sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selection effect C is executed during the jackpot game. Here, during the jackpot game, a selection effect of selecting one image from a plurality of images showing the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed. That is, the selection effect is
This is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, an effect in which one image is selected from two types of images "probability variation" and "time reduction" is illustrated. .. Here, when the jackpot game is completed after the selection effect, the game state corresponding to the selected image is set. That is, when the "probability change" image is selected in the selection effect, the probability change state (high probability high base state) is set after the jackpot game. When the "time saving" image is selected in the selection effect, the time saving state (low accuracy and high base state) is set after the big hit game. In other words, after the selection effect, when the jackpot game ends, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (probability change effect,
Time saving effect) is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIG. 7 of this embodiment
8 (A) to 78 (F) suggest that a selection effect in which one image is selected from the two types of images "probability variation" and "time reduction" is started, and the selection effect start effect is used. Applicable. Then, FIG. 78 (H) notifies that "time reduction" has been selected from the two types of images "probability variation" and "time reduction", and corresponds to the selection determination effect. FIGS. 78 (I) to 78 (J) notify that "probability change" is selected from the two types of images "probability change" and "time reduction", which also corresponds to the selection determination effect.

In FIG. 78 (A), the first image SG1 showing “probability change” on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
Is displayed. Next, as shown in FIGS. 78 (B) to 78 (C), the second image SG2 representing "time reduction" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, overlaps with the first image SG1 and stops. Is displayed. The second image SG2 displayed here is larger than the first image SG1 and has a second image.
When the image SG2 overlaps the front of the first image SG1, the first image SG1 becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78 (D) to 78 (E), the first image SG1 representing "probability change" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second image SG2. The first image SG1 displayed here is larger than the second image SG2, and the first image SG1 overlaps the front of the second image SG2, so that the second image SG2 becomes difficult to see. After that, the second image SG2, which is larger than the first image SG1, moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and covers the first image SG1. Next, the first image SG1 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the second image SG2. In this way, the effect of covering the images in which the first and second images are currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the effect speed becomes faster, as shown in FIG. 78 (F).
A high-speed effect display SG is performed in which it is difficult to visually replace the images. FIGS. 78 (A) to 78
In the effect of (F), two types of images "probability change" and "time reduction" are displayed one by one in order, and the player is notified that the selection effect in which one of these images is selected is started. be able to. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. Button image B
The TN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation validity period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including the characters "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one image is selected and determined from the two types of images "probability change" and "time reduction". Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 78 (H), the second image SG2 representing "time reduction" is stopped, and two types of images "probability change" and "probability change" are shown.
Notifies that "time reduction" is selected from "time reduction". In FIG. 78 (J), the first image SG1 representing the “probability change” is stopped, and it is notified that the “probability change” is selected from the two types of images “probability change” and “time reduction”. As shown in FIG. 78 (H), the second image S showing "time reduction".
G2 is displayed (stop display) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. on the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 78 (J), the first image SG1 representing the “probability change” is displayed (stopped) on the right sub-display device 10R of the advance position (expanded position). Specifically, when the first image SG1 representing "probability change" is stopped, as shown in FIG. 78 (I), the first image SG1 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and stop (stop) there. The advance position (deployment position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (J), the right sub-display device 1 of the advance position (deployment position)
The first image SG1 is displayed on 0R. An effect image EF, which is a light emitting image, is displayed around the first image SG1. The effect image EF is the main display device 7 and the sub display device 1.
It is displayed across 0. This effect image EF notifies that the "probability change" of the first image SG1 has been confirmed. In FIG. 78 (I), the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
The first image SG1 may be displayed in a. In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image finally selected as the game state after the jackpot game, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected, which is a hobby. It can be improved. Here, when the first image SG1 representing "probability change" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that the player can be given a special feeling. Second image SG2 and first image SG
1 is displayed at substantially the same position with respect to the main display device 7.

[Selection effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect D. In the selection effect D, first, FIG. 79 (A).
), The sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selection effect D is executed during the variation effect of the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). Here, during the variation effect of the probability variation state, a selection effect of selecting one image from a plurality of images showing the lottery result for the variation is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, the three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "big hit" An example is an effect in which one image is selected. Here, after the selection effect, the game state corresponding to the selected image is set. That is, when the "falling" image is selected in the selection effect, the normal state (low accuracy and low base state) is subsequently set. When the "continue" image is selected in the selection effect, the probability change state (high accuracy and high base state) continues as it is. "Great hit" with selective production
When the image of is selected, the jackpot game is executed. In other words, after the selection effect, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (normal state effect, time saving state effect, jackpot game effect) is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIG. 7 of this embodiment
9 (A) to 79 (F) suggest that a selection effect in which one image is selected from the three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "big hit" is started, and selection is started. It corresponds to the production start production. Then, FIG. 79 (H) shows "fall" from the three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "big hit".
Is notified that has been selected, and corresponds to the selection decision effect. 79 (I) to 79 (J)
) Notifies that "big hit" is selected from the three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "big hit", which also corresponds to the selection decision effect.

In FIG. 79 (A), the left symbol LS, the right symbol RS, and the first middle symbol CS1 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left symbol LS and the right symbol RS are images represented as "falling", and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The first middle symbol CS1 is an image represented as "falling", and is temporarily stopped and displayed between the left symbol LS and the right symbol RS. Next, FIGS. 79 (B) to 7
As shown in 9 (C), the second middle symbol CS2 representing "continuation" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is stopped and displayed so as to overlap the first middle symbol CS1. The second displayed here
The middle symbol CS2 is larger than the first middle symbol CS1, and the second middle symbol CS2 is the first middle symbol CS1.
By overlapping in front of, the first middle symbol CS1 becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (D) to 79 (E), the third middle symbol CS3 representing the “big hit” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and moves to the second middle symbol CS2. Overlap. The third middle symbol CS3 displayed here is larger than the second middle symbol CS2, and the third middle symbol CS3 overlaps in front of the second middle symbol CS2, so that the second middle symbol CS2 is difficult to see. Become. After that, the first middle symbol CS1 larger than the third middle symbol CS3 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the third middle symbol CS3. Next, the second middle symbol CS2 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the first middle symbol CS1. In this way, the effect of covering the middle symbols in which the first to third middle symbols are currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the effect speed becomes faster, and as shown in FIG. 79 (F), it is difficult to visually recognize the replacement of the middle symbols. High-speed production display CS is made. In the production of FIGS. 79 (A) to 79 (F), three types of images "fall", "continuation", and "big hit" are displayed one by one in order, and one of these images is selected. It is possible to notify the player that the selection effect is started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the high-speed effect display CS disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. Button image B
The TN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation validity period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including the characters "press" and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, three types of images "fall", "continue", and "continue"
A selection decision effect is executed in which one image is selected and decided from the "big hit". Here, the selection decision notifies the player of the selected image by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 79 (H), the first middle symbol CS1 representing “fall” is stopped, and three types of images “fall” are shown.
It informs that "fall" is selected from "continuation" and "big hit". In FIG. 79 (J), the third middle symbol CS3 representing “big hit” is stopped, and three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “big hit” are displayed.
It informs that "Daito" has been selected from among them. As shown in FIG. 79 (H), the first middle symbol CS1 representing “fall” is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79 (J), the third middle symbol CS3 representing the “big hit” is displayed (stopped) on the right sub display device 10R of the advance position (deployment position). Specifically, when the third middle symbol CS3 representing "great hit" is stopped, as shown in FIG. 79 (I), as shown in FIG. 79 (I).
The right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position) while the third middle symbol CS3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. By doing so, it moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stands still (stops) there. The advance position (deployment position) is the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
It is a position that covers the above-mentioned predetermined position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (J), the right sub-display device 1 of the advance position (deployment position)
The third middle symbol CS3 is displayed on 0R. An effect image EF, which is a light emitting image, is displayed around the third middle symbol CS3. The effect image EF is displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF is the "big hit" of the 3rd middle symbol CS3.
Is informed that has been confirmed. In FIG. 79 (I), the third middle symbol CS3 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image finally selected during the variation effect of the probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), a special feeling when a specific image is selected is produced. It is possible to improve the interest. Here, when the third middle symbol CS3 representing "big hit" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that the player can be given a special feeling. The first middle symbol CS1 and the third middle symbol CS3 are displayed at substantially the same position with respect to the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the sub-display device 1
By using 0 and the main display device 7, it is possible to execute a selection effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents. In the selection effect of FIG. 76, when the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3, which is one of a plurality of types of images, is selected, the third display device 10 is selected.
The intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed, and the second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2, which is one of a plurality of types of images, is displayed.
When is selected, the selected second intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 is displayed on the main display device 7.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 77 (H) to (J), 78 (H) to (J), and 79 (H) to (J).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the sub-display device 10 is configured to be movable, and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is selected in the selection effect of FIG. 76. In this case, the sub-display device 10 moves from the first position to the second position, and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed at the second position (FIG. 76 (J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. 77 (J), 78 (J)
, FIG. 79 (J) is the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when the second middle decoration symbol 8C2 is selected in the selection effect, the second middle decoration is placed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. When the symbol 8C2 is displayed and the third intermediate decorative symbol 8C3 is selected, the sub-display device 10
Stops at the advance position that covers the predetermined position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the third
The intermediate decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed (FIG. 76 (J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. 77 (J), 78 (J),
The same applies to FIG. 79 (J).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 76 (A) to 76 (F) and 77 (A) to 77 (FIG. 77).
As shown in F), FIGS. 78 (A) to 78 (F), and 79 (A) to 79 (F), the selection effect is a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started. , A selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images after the selection start suggestion effect is included. In the selection start suggestion effect, a plurality of types are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The images of are displayed one by one in order. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 76 (A) to 76 (F) and 77 (A) to 77 (FIG. 77).
As shown in F), FIGS. 78 (A) to 78 (F), and 79 (A) to 79 (F), in the selection start suggestion effect, a plurality of types are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. When each image is displayed one by one in turn, after the first image is displayed, a second image larger than the first image is displayed at a position covering the first image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an effect button 63 that can be operated by the player, and FIG. 7
6 (G) to 76 (J), 77 (G) to 77 (J), 78 (G) to 78 (J),
As shown in FIGS. 79 (G) to 79 (J), when the effect button 63 is operated after the selection start effect, the selection decision effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the plurality of types of images are associated with one of the plurality of types of effects executed after the selection effect, and the selection effect After that, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the selection effect A of FIG. 76, the selection effect C of FIG. 78, and the selection effect D of FIG. 79, the right sub-display device 10R is assumed to move. However, the left sub-display device 10L may be configured to move.

[Modification 2]
In the selection effect B of FIG. 77, it is assumed that both the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R of the sub-display devices 10 move upward. However, the configuration may be such that only the right sub-display device 10R moves upward and the left sub-display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the selection effects A to D of FIGS. 76 to 79 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the selection effect C of FIG. 78, the left symbol LS and the right symbol RS may be displayed on both sides of the first image SG1 and the second image SG2 as in the selection effect D of FIG. 79.

[Modification 5]
In each of the selected effects A to D of FIGS. 76 to 79, a part of the described effects may not be provided, or other effects may be added. For example, in the selection effect D of FIG. 79,
When the second middle symbol CS2 is selected, the right sub-display device 10 in which the second middle symbol CS2 is in the advanced position
It may be displayed on R, or may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Also,
When the second middle symbol CS2 is randomly displayed on the right sub-display device 10R of the advance position, and when
It may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
The first display means capable of displaying an image and
A gaming machine provided with a second display means capable of displaying an image.
Using the first display means and the second display means, it is possible to execute a selection effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents.
In the selection effect,
When the first image, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected first image is displayed in the first display means, and the selected first image is displayed.
When the second image, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected second image is displayed in the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1.
The first display means is configured to be movable.
In the selection effect
When the first image is selected, the first display means moves from the first position to the second position, and the first image is displayed at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
In the selection effect
When the second image is selected, the second image is displayed at a predetermined position in the second display means, and the second image is displayed.
When the first image is selected, the first display means stops at a second position covering the predetermined position of the second display means, and the first image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3.
The selection effect is
The selection start suggestion effect suggesting that the selection effect is started, and the selection start suggestion effect.
After the selection start suggestion effect, a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images is included.
In the selection start suggestion effect, the plurality of types of images are displayed one by one in order in the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4.
In the selection start suggestion effect,
In the second display means, when the plurality of types of images are displayed one by one in order, after the first image is displayed, a second image larger than the first image is displayed. Displayed in a position that covers the first image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-4 or the aspect A5-5 is further described.
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player.
When the operating means is operated after the selection start effect, the selection determination effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6.
The plurality of types of images are associated with one of the plurality of types of effects executed after the selection effect.
After the selection effect, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, a plurality of image pseudo-continuous effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. This multi-image pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18
Is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Multiple image pseudo-continuous production A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of image pseudo-continuous production A. In the plurality of image pseudo-continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo-continuous production,
The pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed over the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, in the pseudo-continuous production, the character CRA is the right sub-display device 1.
It is displayed over 0R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach production,
The decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo-continuous production B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of image pseudo-continuous production B. In the plurality of image pseudo continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo-continuous production,
The pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
The pseudo-continuous image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. This pseudo-continuous image Z
C1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous production. Further, the pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed over the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach production,
The decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo-continuous production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of image pseudo-continuous production C. In the plurality of image pseudo-continuous effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo-continuous production,
The pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
The pseudo-continuous image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and is displayed on the illumination panel 18 on the display screen 7a.
Pseudo-continuous image ZC1 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, pseudo-continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L,
It is displayed in an area other than the area (part) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this case, on the illumination panel 18, the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, Z
The region corresponding to C2 and ZC3 is a transparent region that is transparent. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed over the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach production,
The decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multiple image pseudo-continuous production D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of image pseudo-continuous production D. In the plurality of image pseudo-continuous effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo-continuous production,
The pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a (near the expansion position of the left sub-display device 10L), the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC
3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed on the illumination panel 18
Is displayed in. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the characters "NEXT" are shown, suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and is a pseudo-continuous image ZC displayed on the display screen 7a on the illumination panel 18.
1. It is displayed in an area other than the area (part) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L and the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this case, in the illumination panel 18, the region corresponding to the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3 is a transparent transparent region. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed over the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the button image ZC5 is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo continuous image ZC1 on the display screen 7a. This button image ZC5 is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63. Further, in this button display effect, in the illumination panel 18, the area corresponding to the button image ZC5 of the display screen 7a is a transparent area. In other words, in the illumination panel 18, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is
It is displayed in an area other than the area corresponding to the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and ZC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this sub-display device movement effect, when the effect button 63 is pressed (button pushed) by the player who has seen the button image ZC5, the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the home position to the unfolded position. A part of the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. That is, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L. In this case, the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has been erased. Further, in the illumination panel 18, the region corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L is a transmission region. In other words, in the illumination panel 18.
The pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed in an area other than the area corresponding to the pseudo-continuous image ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and the left sub-display device 10L. That is, in this sub-display device movement effect, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the pseudo-continuous image ZC2, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the left sub-display device 10L moves and the left sub-display device 10L has a pseudo-continuous image. When ZC1 is displayed, a pseudo-continuous effect or an effect suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach production,
The decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Further, in the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

The above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-continuous production is performed with the same variation. However, it may be done with different fluctuations.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 are images constituting the pseudo-continuous production, but the pseudo-continuous production is continued or the pseudo-continuous production is performed. It may contain suggestions.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the multiple image pseudo-continuous production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the plurality of image pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed using the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a dynamic pseudo-continuous production using two display devices, so that the interest of the game can be improved.
In the plurality of image pseudo-continuous effect D, the left sub-display device 10 is used in the sub-display device movement effect.
When L moves to the expanded position, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed, but the pseudo-continuous image ZC
Pseudo-continuous images other than 1 (for example, pseudo-continuous image ZC2 or a new pseudo-continuous image) may be displayed.
In the plurality of image pseudo-continuous effect D, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the display screen 7a in the button display effect, but is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, on the pseudo-continuous image) of the sub display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. You may.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous image ZC capable of configuring the pseudo-continuous effect on the display screen 7a.
1 is displayed, and pseudo-continuous images ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 that can form a pseudo-continuous effect are displayed on the sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a pseudo-continuous image on each of two or more display devices to perform a dynamic pseudo-continuous effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned image pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous images ZC2, ZC3, Z that can constitute the pseudo-continuous production
The sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18 on which C4 is displayed is arranged in front of the display screen 7a on which the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 that can form a pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. According to this configuration, two pseudo-continuous images can be expressed three-dimensionally, and a three-dimensional and dynamic pseudo-continuous production can be performed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
The above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-continuous production is performed with the same variation. According to this configuration, since the effect of displaying two pseudo-continuous images can be made into a series of display effects, it is possible to create a three-dimensional and dynamic pseudo-continuous effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. it can.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo-series effect, when the pseudo-series image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the illumination panel 18 is provided with a transparent area in a region different from the area where the pseudo-series image ZC4 is displayed. The continuous image ZC1 is configured to be visible through the transmission region of the illumination panel 18. According to this configuration, since the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 can be peeked out from the transparent region of the illumination panel 18, it is possible to create an exciting feeling of the pseudo-continuous production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZC-1]
A gaming machine including a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
The first display means and the second display means can each execute a plurality of types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a predetermined effect may be performed.
As the predetermined effect, a pseudo continuous effect using the first display means and the second display means is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-2]
The gaming machine described in ZC-1.
In the predetermined display effect, the first display means displays a first pseudo-continuous image that can form the pseudo-continuous effect, and the second display means can configure the pseudo-continuous effect. Pseudo continuous image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-3]
The gaming machine described in ZC-2.
The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-4]
The gaming machine described in ZC-3.
The predetermined display effect is performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-5]
The gaming machine described in ZC-4.
In the predetermined display effect, when the first pseudo-continuous image is displayed on the first display means, the second display means includes an area where the second pseudo-continuous image is displayed. Is provided with a transparent region that is transparent to different regions, and the first pseudo-continuous image is visible through the transparent region of the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The operation unit image (button image) is displayed on the first pseudo-ream image, and the effect suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-ream or the pseudo-ream effect is performed by pushing the button.
By pushing the button, the third display means moves to the front of the first pseudo-continuous image of the first display means, and the first pseudo-continuous image is displayed on the third display means.
○ When the third display means moves, the second pseudo-continuous image disappears.

The image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. This image display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
Analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the image display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is sub. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the display device 10. Further, in the image display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Image display effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the continuous notice effect is executed. In the continuous notice production, "
The effect preview image PNG1 "continue" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In the production notice image PNG1, the characters "continue" are arranged in the horizontal direction. The production suggested by "continuation" is a pseudo-continuous production. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG1, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of linearly moving from the retracted position to the relay position. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotation movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG2, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of rotating and moving from the relay position to the advance position. Here, too, the reserved image 9A is the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
Displayed in a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the image display effect is executed. This image display effect is
This is an effect of displaying the effect notice image PNG2 similar to the effect notice image PNG1 in the continuous notice effect on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L moved to the advance position. Direction notice image PNG
In 2, the characters "continue" are arranged in the vertical direction. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the revariation effect is executed. This re-variation effect is an effect of re-variating the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R for the pseudo-ream. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L returns to the retracted position (home position). Left sub display device 10L
The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

[Image display effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the continuous notice effect is executed. In the continuous notice production, "
The effect preview image PNG1 "continue" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In the production notice image PNG1, the characters "continue" are arranged in the horizontal direction. The production suggested by "continuation" is a pseudo-continuous production. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG1, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of linearly moving from the retracted position to the relay position. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, the display device 7a
The image of the portion of the image covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotation movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG2, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of rotating and moving from the relay position to the advance position. Here, too, the reserved image 9A is the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
Displayed in a. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the image display effect is executed. This image display effect is
This is an effect of displaying the effect notice image PNG2 similar to the effect notice image PNG1 in the continuous notice effect on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L moved to the advance position. Direction notice image PNG
In 2, the characters "continue" are arranged in the vertical direction. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), the revariation effect is executed. This re-variation effect is an effect of re-variating the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R for the pseudo-ream. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L returns to the retracted position (home position). Left sub display device 10L
The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

[Image display effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the chance effect is executed. In the chance effect, the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the message image MG1 is "super hot", and the characters "super hot" are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG1, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of linearly moving from the retracted position to the relay position. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, the display device 7a
The image of the portion of the image covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotation movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG2, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of rotating and moving from the relay position to the advance position. Here, too, the reserved image 9A is the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
Displayed in a. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the image display effect is executed. This image display effect is
This is an effect of displaying the same message image MG2 as the message image MG1 in the chance effect on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moved to the advance position. Message image MG
In 2, the characters "super hot" are arranged in the vertical direction. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. And ally character CR
If A wins, it will be a big hit. The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "5". The display of the reserved image 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Image display effect D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the chance effect is executed. In the chance effect, the message image MG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the message image MG is "super hot", and the characters "super hot" are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. And ally character CR
If A wins, it will be a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both set to "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is set to "4". The right sub-display device 10
The display of the reserved image 9C on the display screen of R disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

In FIG. 86, the message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, FIG.
In 7, the message image MG is displayed only on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the image display effect C shown in FIG. 86 has a higher expectation for a big hit than the image display effect D shown in FIG. 87.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview image PNG1 is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
After displaying in a, the effect notice image PNG2 similar to the effect notice image PNG1 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIGS. 84 (C) (F), 85 (C) (F)). Further, after displaying the message image MG1 on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left sub display device 1
A message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 is displayed on the 0L display screen (FIGS. 86 (C) and 86 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the production notice image and the message image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L is moved (FIGS. 84 (D) (E).
), FIGS. 85 (D) (E), 86 (D) (E)), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
The production notice image PNG2 and the message image MG2 are displayed. According to this configuration, since the left sub-display device 10L is moved, it is possible to make the effect notice image and the message image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a from the retracted position.
It moves to the advance position so as to cover the effect notice image PNG1 and the message image MG1 displayed on the screen. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the production notice image and the message image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect notice image PNG is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
2. After displaying the message image MG2, the left sub-display device 10L is returned to the retracted position. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the production notice image and the message image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, while the left sub display device 10L is moving, the image of the portion of the image of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. It can be displayed on the display screen (FIGS. 85 (D) (E), 86 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the display of the display screen 7a is not hindered by the movement of the left sub-display device 10L, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIG. 86).
Compared with the case where the message image MG is displayed only on the display screen 7a (FIG. 87), the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high. According to this configuration, expectations are raised for the display on the left sub-display device 10L, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview image PNG1 that announces the effect to be executed later,
Display PNG2. With this configuration, you can impress the production that will be performed later.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect using the left sub-display device 10L has been used, but in addition to or in place of the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R may be used to display the effect notice image or the message image.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the message image of "super hot" has been described as an example, but the message image is not limited to this. For example, various images such as the number of acquired game balls, instructions during the game such as "right-handed", "Congratulations" at the time of a big hit, and a title display showing the type of the big hit are targeted.

[Modification 3]
In the above, when the left sub display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, when the left sub display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A may be displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A7-1]
The first display device that can display images and produce effects,
A gaming machine provided with a second display device different from the first display device.
After displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the display screen of the second display device is provided with an effect control means capable of displaying an image similar to the predetermined image. A game machine to play.

[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1.
After displaying the predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the effect control means moves the second display device and displays an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device. A gaming machine characterized by playing.

[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-2.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second display device is moved from an origin position so as to cover the predetermined image.

[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-3.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that after displaying an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device, the second display device is returned to the origin position.

[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-2 to A7-4.
While the second display device is moving, the effect control means displays an image of a portion covered by the second display device on the display screen of the first display device on the display screen of the second display device. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

[Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5.
The effect control means displays a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, and then the second display device.
When an image similar to the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the display device, the expectation for a jackpot is higher than when the predetermined image is displayed only on the display screen of the first display device. A game machine to be.

[Aspect A7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-6.
The predetermined image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a preview image that announces an effect to be executed later.

[Aspect A7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-7.
The effect control means can display a hold image corresponding to the hold storage on the display screen of the second display device, and when the hold image is not displayed on the second display device, the effect control means causes the first display device to display the hold image. A gaming machine characterized by displaying information related to a reserved image.

The sub-display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. This sub-display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
Analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the sub display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is sub. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the display device 10. Further, in the sub-display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub-display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Sub display effect A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG1, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of linearly moving from the retracted position to the relay position. At this time, the left sub-display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a
The image of the portion covered with is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotation movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG2, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of rotating and moving from the relay position to the advance position. Here, too, the left sub-display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a
The image of the portion covered with is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. Here, the message image "Hot" is displayed.
The message image of "Atsuizo" is displayed overlaid on the battle image.
In FIGS. 88 (D), (E), and (F), a battle effect is executed in parallel with the above-mentioned effect. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle production, the expectation for the jackpot will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that "5", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is stopped.

[Sub display effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 89A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here ally character CR
If A wins, the expectation for a big hit will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, ally character CRA, enemy character C
The foot portion of the RB is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the message image of "Geki" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
A "hot" message image is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This medium symbol variation effect is an effect of variablely displaying the medium effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the left part of the middle effect symbol 8C "3" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the right part of the middle effect symbol 8C "3" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The part is displayed and is moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "5". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Sub display effect C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG1, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of linearly moving from the retracted position to the relay position. At this time, the left sub-display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a
The image of the portion covered with is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotation movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG2, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of rotating and moving from the relay position to the advance position. The image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the special symbol stop effect is executed. This special symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advanced position, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a special symbol. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C called "development" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here ally character CR
If A wins, the expectation for a big hit will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, ally character CRA, enemy character C
The foot portion of the RB is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the message image of "Geki" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
A "hot" message image is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In addition, it should be noted.
The message image is displayed overlaid on the image of the battle effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "5". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Sub display effect D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
It was shown that L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a.
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG1, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of linearly moving from the retracted position to the relay position. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, the display device 7a
The image of the portion of the image covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the rotation movement effect is executed. This rotation movement production is
As shown by the arrow YG2, the left sub-display device 10L is an effect of rotating and moving from the relay position to the advance position. Here, too, the reserved image 9A is the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
Displayed in a. Further, the image of the portion of the image of the display device 7a covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. Here, the message image "Hot" is displayed.
The message image of "Atsuizo" is displayed overlaid on the battle image.
In FIGS. 91 (D), (E), and (F), a battle effect is executed in parallel with the above-mentioned effect. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in the battle production, the expectation for the jackpot will increase.
Further, during the battle effect, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that “3”, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, fluctuates downward as indicated by the arrow YG3. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (H), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that "5", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is stopped. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the sub-display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed by using the display screen of the sub display device 10 (FIGS. 88 (D), (E), and (2). F), FIGS. 89 (D) (E), 90 (C) (D) (F) (G), 91 (D) (E) (F)). Further, the hold image 9A is displayed by using the display screen of the sub display device 10 (FIG. 88 (A) (FIG. 88 (A)).
B) (C), FIGS. 89 (A) (B) (C) (G), FIGS. 90 (A) (B) (H), FIG. 91 (A).
) (B) (C)). Furthermore, using the display screen of the sub-display device 10, the medium effect symbol 8
C is displayed (FIGS. 88 (G) (H), FIG. 89 (F), FIG. 90 (E), FIG. 91 (G) (H)).
). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by various effects on the sub display device 10.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an image of a portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (FIG. 88 (Fig. 88). F), FIGS. 89 (D) (E), 90 (F) (G), 91 (F)). According to this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, while moving the left sub-display device 10L, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. (Fig. 88 (D) (E), Fig. 90 (C) (D), Fig. 91 (
D) (E)). According to this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a message image can be displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 together with a part of the image of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 88 (F), 89 (E),
90 (G), 91 (F)). According to this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8 is used by using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.
The stop display of C is performed (FIG. 88 (H), FIG. 90 (E), FIG. 91 (H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to raise expectations for the stop effect of the medium effect symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to perform variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 88 (G), 89 (F), 91 (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to raise expectations for the subsequent stop production of the intermediate production symbol 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the sub-display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in one variation, a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed, the hold image 9A is displayed, and the medium effect symbol 8C is displayed by using the display screen of the sub display device 10. Is displayed. On the other hand, it is not necessary to do everything during one fluctuation.
[Modification 2]
In the above, the message images of "hot" and "super hot" are superimposed on the battle image in the message addition effect. On the other hand, instead of the battle image, only the message image may be displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A8-1]
The first display device that can display images and produce effects,
A gaming machine provided with a second display device different from the first display device.
Using the display screen of the second display device, a part of the image displayed on the display screen of the first display device is displayed, and the first effect and the hold memory constituting the image together with the first display device are used. It is characterized by being provided with an effect control means capable of performing a second effect of displaying the corresponding reserved image and a third effect of displaying a predetermined row of effect symbols on the display screen of the first display device. A game machine to play.

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1.
In the first effect, the effect control means displays an image of a portion of the image displayed on the display screen of the first display device covered by the second display device on the display screen of the second display device. A gaming machine characterized by playing.

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2.
The effect control means can move the second display device in the first effect, and during the movement of the second display device, the portion covered by the second display device is displayed on the second display. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed on the display screen of the device.

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-3.
The effect control means is characterized in that, in the first effect, another image can be displayed on the second display device by superimposing or substituting an image of a portion covered by the second display device. A game machine to play.

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-4.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the third effect, a stop display of a predetermined row of effect symbols in the first display device is performed.

[Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-5.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the third effect, variable display of a predetermined row of effect symbols in the first display device is performed.

[Aspect A8-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-6.
In at least one of the first effect and the third effect, the effect control means displays the hold image corresponding to the hold storage on a display screen of a display device different from the second display device. A featured gaming machine.

Hereinafter, the reserved arrangement direction change effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. This hold arrangement direction change effect can be executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold arrangement direction change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main The display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the sub display device 1
An image is displayed on the display screen of 0 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold arrangement direction change effect, the left sub-display device 1
The position and inclination of 0L and the right sub-display device 10R) are changed.

[Holding arrangement direction change effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the hold arrangement direction change effect A. In the hold arrangement direction change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a hold arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L changes is executed. In this embodiment, when the left sub-display device 10L is stationary without changing its position or posture, the display positions of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are changed. , An embodiment in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A changes is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 92 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 92 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8
A reach is formed in which L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at "2". At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position) and stops at the relay position. During the upward movement of the sub-display device 10, the four hold icons 9A maintain their display. That is, by moving the sub-display device 10 upward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. ..

As shown in FIG. 92C, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-ream suggestion image represented as “ream” suggesting that the pseudo-ream is started as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed. ..
At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is
It stands still at the relay position, and in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is switched from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. In this switching, the display of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the horizontal direction may disappear, and the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction may be newly displayed, or the display of the four hold icons 9A may be maintained. so,
The arrangement direction may gradually switch from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. Here, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A is also horizontal. That is, each of the hold icons 9A is displayed at an angle of 90 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 92 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an image represented as "second time !!!" is displayed, which suggests that the second time of the pseudo-ream is started. Then, FIG. 9
As shown in 2 (E), a third reach is formed. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the battle effect is executed. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is stationary at the relay position, and in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is A continuously changing production is performed. In other words, the effect of continuously changing the angle in the direction (arrangement direction) in which the four hold icons 9A are arranged is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction, the fourth hold at the top is set as the rotation axis, and the first to first hold icons are maintained. 3 Hold moves counterclockwise. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92 (D) to 92 (E), the left sub display device 10L approaches the horizontal side, and finally, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the left sub display device It will be in a state along the horizontal side of 10L. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes according to the change in the arrangement direction. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction.

As shown in FIG. 92 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the battle effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner after being defeated. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) moves from the relay position toward the lower evacuation position (home position) and stands still at the evacuation position. During the downward movement of the sub-display device 10, the four hold icons 9A maintain their display. That is, by moving the sub-display device 10 downward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. ..

As shown in FIG. 92 (H), the following variable display is made on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is stationary at the retracted position, and the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) has a hold number of 3 due to hold digestion. Three hold icons 9A are displayed. Here, the arrangement direction of the three hold icons 9A is continuously changed.
During this effect, as shown in FIG. 92 (I), when the variable display ends on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) is displayed. ) Hold icon 9A has a hold number of 2 due to hold digestion. At this time, the hold icon 9A is continuously produced to continuously change the arrangement direction. FIG. 92 (
As shown in J), when the number of hold icons 9A (number of holds) of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) is 1, one hold icon 9A is an array when there are two or more holds. The display position changes so that the direction changes. In addition, the inclination of the hold icon 9A also changes.

[Holding arrangement direction change effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the hold arrangement direction change effect B. In the hold arrangement direction change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a hold arrangement direction change effect is executed in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the main display device 7 or the left sub display device 10L changes. In this embodiment, the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A changes by changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the stationary state. By changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A changes, and the left sub display. An embodiment in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L changes as the posture of the device 10L changes is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 93 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 93 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the effect of continuously changing the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is performed. In other words, the effect of continuously changing the angle in the direction (arrangement direction) in which the four hold icons 9A are arranged is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the horizontal direction, the rightmost first hold is set as the rotation axis, and the second to second hold icons are maintained. 4 Hold moves clockwise. As a result, FIG. 93 (B)
As shown in FIG. 93 (C), the arrangement directions of the four hold icons 9A approach vertical, and FIG. 9
As shown in 3 (C), finally, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A becomes vertical. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes according to the change in the arrangement direction. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93 (C) and 93 (D), the movement effect of the four vertically arranged hold icons 9A is executed. Specifically, the four vertically arranged hold icons 9A are
Move horizontally (to the right) while maintaining the display. In other words, the four hold icons 9A move in the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal (intersecting) with the arrangement direction (vertical direction). Then, it stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction tilt to the left while maintaining the display, and stop in that state. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the four hold icons 9
A moves upward in an inclined state. Also in this case, the four hold icons 9A arranged diagonally move in the vertical direction (upward direction) while maintaining the display. In other words, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) that intersects the arrangement direction (diagonal direction). Then, it stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. 4 hold icons 9
A may not stop at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, but may be framed out from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the left sub display device 10L after disappearing from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub-display device 10L. Next, FIG. 9
As shown in 3 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advanced position (deployed position). There, it stands still (stops). At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A also changes as the sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise. That is, the hold icon 9A
Each of the icons changes its orientation so that the orientation of the icons matches the arrangement orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (I), in a state where the left sub-display device 10L is stationary (stopped) at the advanced position (deployed position), the arrangement directions of the four hold icons 9A change continuously. The production is done. In other words, the effect of continuously changing the angle in the direction (arrangement direction) in which the four hold icons 9A are arranged is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 93 (I) and 93 (J), the four hold icons 9A have a state in which the arrangement direction is tilted diagonally to the right and a state in which the arrangement direction is tilted diagonally to the left. The left sub-display device 10L moves from the upper side to the lower side while swinging alternately.

[Holding arrangement direction change effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the hold arrangement direction change effect C. In the hold arrangement direction change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a hold arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L changes is executed. In this embodiment, the left sub-display device 10 is changed by changing the posture of the left sub-display device 10L.
An embodiment in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of L changes is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 94 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 94 (B), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position). During the upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A maintain their display. That is, by moving the left sub-display device 10L upward, the four hold icons 9A are displayed while maintaining the display of the hold icon 9.
It moves in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (intersecting) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94 (C) to 94 (D), the left sub-display device 10L is set to the relay position (
By rotating clockwise in the relay position), it moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stops (stops) there. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. Each of the hold icons 9A is a sub display device 10.
The inclination also changes with the clockwise rotation of L. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons coincides with the arrangement direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (E),
The four hold icons 9A disappear on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advance position (deployment position). At this time, another image may be displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L instead of the hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 94 (F) to 94 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployment position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and at the retracted position. Stand still (stop). At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes due to the left rotation of the left sub display device 10L. .. Further, by moving the left sub-display device 10L downward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94 (I) to 94 (J), the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub-display device 10L. In this state, the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and rest (stop) there. At this time,
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A and four hold icons 9
Since B is displayed, the arrangement direction of the hold icons 9A and 9B changes by rotating the left sub-display device 10L to the right. Each of the hold icons 9A and 9B is a sub display device 1.
The tilt also changes with the clockwise rotation of 0L. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A and 9B changes so that the orientation of the icons coincides with the arrangement direction.

[Holding arrangement direction change effect D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the hold arrangement direction change effect D. In the hold arrangement direction change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at “2”. On the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a hold arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L changes is executed. In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes by changing the posture of the left sub display device 10L is illustrated. A specific image TG is also displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. The specific image represents the appearance of the specific object in the specific image TG. here,
The specific image TG is a smiley face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 95 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-ream suggestion image represented as "ream" suggesting that the pseudo-ream is started as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed. ..
At this time, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position). While moving upward of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9
A maintains the display. That is, by moving the left sub-display device 10L upward, 4
The two hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to (intersect) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95 (C) to 95 (D), the left sub-display device 10L is set to the relay position (
By rotating clockwise in the relay position), it moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stops (stops) there. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. Each of the hold icons 9A is a sub display device 10.
The inclination also changes with the clockwise rotation of L. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons coincides with the arrangement direction. Since the specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the inclination of the specific image TG also changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), the four hold icons 9A and the specific image TG disappear on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advance position (deployment position). After that, an image represented as "second time" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, suggesting that the second time of the pseudo-ream is started.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 95 (F) to 95 (H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and at the retracted position. Stand still (stop). At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes due to the left rotation of the left sub display device 10L. .. Further, by moving the left sub-display device 10L downward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (crossing) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), the second variation display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are "6".
A reach that is temporarily stopped and displayed is formed, and a pseudo-ream suggestion image represented as "ream" that suggests that the pseudo-ream is started as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95 (I) to 95 (J), the left sub-display device 10L is set to the relay position (
By rotating clockwise in the relay position), it moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stops (stops) there. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A changes by rotating the left sub display device 10L to the right. Each of the hold icons 9A is a sub display device 10.
The inclination also changes with the clockwise rotation of L. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icons coincides with the arrangement direction. Since the specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the inclination of the specific image TG also changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates clockwise. As shown in FIG. 95 (J), four hold icons 9 are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advance position (deployment position).
A and the specific image TG disappear, and an image represented as "third time" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, suggesting that the third time of the pseudo-ream is started.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold arrangement direction change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, the arrangement direction in which the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons changes by changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the sub display device 10. You can perform change effects. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, by changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the main display device 7, it is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons is changed. 94, 9
As shown in 5, the sub-display device 10 is changed by changing the posture of the sub-display device 10.
It is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of a plurality of hold icons displayed in is changed. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 92 (D) (E), 93 (A) (B), and 94 (C).
) (D), as shown in FIGS. 95 (C) and 95 (D), in the arrangement direction change effect, the angles of the plurality of hold icons in the line-up direction change while maintaining the display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 92 (G), 93 (E) (F), 94 (G) (H).
), As shown in FIGS. 95 (G) and 95 (H), in the arrangement direction change effect, a plurality of hold icons are displayed.
After the line-up angle changes, it moves in the direction that intersects the line-up direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 92 (B) (G), 93 (C) (D) (G), and FIG. 9
As shown in 4 (B) (G) and FIGS. 95 (B) (G), in the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction while maintaining the display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 (D) and 93 (B), in the arrangement direction change effect, one of a plurality of hold icons is displayed in the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. By changing the display position of the above-mentioned hold icons, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 are arranged changes. According to this configuration
The player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 93 (H), 94 (C) (F), 95 (C) (F).
), The sub-display device 10 is configured to be rotatable, and in the arrangement direction change effect, a plurality of hold icons displayed on the sub-display device 10 are lined up by rotating the sub-display device 10. The direction changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold arrangement direction change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, it is assumed that the plurality of hold icons 9A are arranged in a straight line. However, the plurality of hold icons 9A may be displayed side by side in a curved line.
In this case, the approximate straight line of the plurality of hold icons 9A can be regarded as the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons 9A. Further, even when a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed irregularly such as in a zigzag pattern, the approximate straight line can be regarded as the arrangement direction.

[Modification 2]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 is illustrated, but the hold arrangement direction change effect may be the hold icon 9B or the hold icon 9C corresponding to the special figure 2. .. Further, the angle in the arrangement direction of one or both of these may be changed while both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A is assumed to change according to the change in the arrangement direction. However, in the hold arrangement direction change effect, the hold icon 9
Only the arrangement direction may change without changing the orientation of each of A.

[Modification example 4]
When the arrangement direction of the hold icon 9A changes in the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D,
The display may not be maintained in the portion where the display is maintained, and the display may be maintained in the portion where the display is not maintained.

[Modification 5]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, the hold icon 9A may be displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. Further, the arrangement direction of the hold icon 9A may change while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the reserved arrangement direction change effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the reserved arrangement direction change effects A to D may not include a part of the described effects, or other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
It is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the angles of the plurality of hold icons in the line-up direction change while maintaining the display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction after the line-up angle changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction while maintaining the display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
In the arrangement direction change effect, in the display means, the display position of one or more of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons is changed, so that the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged is changed. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
The display means is configured to be rotatable and can be rotated.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the rotation of the display means changes the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The hold display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. This hold display effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
Analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the hold display effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the corresponding image data to the display screen 7a or the sub of the main display device 7. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R).

[Holding display effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect A. In the hold display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 1)
0R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, three hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, such as the right sub-display device 10R,
It has a shape that is a combination of an inner rectangle and an outer rectangle that surrounds the rectangle. The inner rectangular part is a part imitating the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the part between the inner rectangle and the outer rectangle is a part imitating the outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. .. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96B, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, FIGS. 96 (D) to
As shown in FIG. 96 (J), the rightmost hold icon 9A of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the left sub display device 10L. First display position DP1 that displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen
Moves to the second display position DP2 for displaying the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the hold icon 9A is the left sub-display device 10L.
From the first display position DP1 to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, it starts to move in a curved shape in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. next,
As shown in FIG. 96 (E), the display of the left sub display device 10L is displayed so that the hold icon 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Part of hold icon 9A on the screen (hold icon 9 with a part missing)
A) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
The hold icon 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), the hold icon 9
A part (part) of the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A) in the state where is missing is displayed. Next, FIG. 96 (I)
As shown in the above, the entire hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.
Is displayed in the upper left position of the display screen. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. Hold icon 9
While A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A straddles the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the right hold icon 9A of the two hold icons 9A is the left sub display device 10.
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of L. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Hold display effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect B. In the hold display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 1)
0R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are on the right sub-display device 10R.
It has a shape that imitates the appearance of. Specifically, it has a rectangular outer shape similar to that of the right sub-display device 10R. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, FIGS. 97 (D) to
As shown in FIG. 97 (J), the rightmost hold icon 9A of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the left sub display device 10L. First display position DP1 that displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen
Moves to the second display position DP2 for displaying the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the hold icon 9A is the left sub-display device 10L.
From the first display position DP1 to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, it starts to move in a curved shape in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. next,
As shown in FIG. 97 (E), the display of the left sub display device 10L is displayed so that the hold icon 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Part of hold icon 9A on the screen (hold icon 9 with a part missing)
A) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
The hold icon 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (H), the hold icon 9
A part (part) of the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A) in the state where is missing is displayed. Next, FIG. 97 (I)
As shown in the above, the entire hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.
Is displayed in the upper left position of the display screen. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. Hold icon 9
While A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A straddles the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the right hold icon 9A of the two hold icons 9A is the left sub display device 10.
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of L. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Hold display effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect C. In the hold display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 1)
0R) is located at the retracted position (home position). The right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub-display device 10R includes an annular portion R1 that constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R includes a circular display screen inside the annular portion R1. The right sub-display device 10R is configured to be movable in the vertical direction between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position located above the retracted position. Circular part R
Reference numeral 1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable clockwise (clockwise) and counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.
Is executed. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The hold icon 9A representing the first special figure hold is displayed in the upper area of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the hold icon 9B (not shown) representing the second special figure hold is displayed in the lower area. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. An image showing the color, pattern, or the like of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, the right sub-display device 10
It has a shape such as R, which is a combination of an inner circle and an outer circle surrounding the circle. The inner circular portion is a portion imitating the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the portion between the inner circular portion and the outer circular portion is an annular portion R1 which is an outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. It is a part that imitates. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, FIGS. 98 (D) to
As shown in FIG. 98 (I), the rightmost hold icon 9A of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the left sub display device 10L. First display position DP1 that displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen
Moves to the second display position DP2 for displaying the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the entire right sub-display device 10R is the second.
The display position is DP2. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
A part of is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the hold icon 9A is the left sub-display device 10L.
From the first display position DP1 to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, it starts to move in a curved shape in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. next,
As shown in FIG. 98 (E), the display of the left sub display device 10L is displayed so that the hold icon 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Part of hold icon 9A on the screen (hold icon 9 with a part missing)
A) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
The hold icon 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the hold icon 9
A part of the hold icon 9A (partially missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the hold icon 9A jumps into the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A) of the status is displayed. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (I), the hold icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Hold display effect D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect D. In the hold display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 1)
0R) is located at the retracted position (home position). The right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub-display device 10R includes an annular portion R1 that constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R includes a circular display screen inside the annular portion R1. The right sub-display device 10R is configured to be movable in the vertical direction between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position located above the retracted position. Circular part R
Reference numeral 1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable clockwise (clockwise) and counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.
Is executed. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The hold icon 9A representing the first special figure hold is displayed in the upper area of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the hold icon 9B (not shown) representing the second special figure hold is displayed in the lower area. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. An image showing the color, pattern, or the like of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape that imitates the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, the right sub-display device 10
It has a shape such as R, which is a combination of an inner circle and an outer circle surrounding the circle. The inner circular portion is a portion that imitates the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the portion between the inner circular portion and the outer circular portion is an annular portion that is an outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. It is a modeled part. The specific target is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but characters, figures, and so on.
It also includes abstract things such as symbols and conceptual things whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It moves from the first display position DP1 that displays 9A to the second display position DP2 that displays the hold icon 9C on the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 1
0R represents the hold icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the entire right sub-display device 10R is the second display position DP2. In addition, the right sub display device 10R
A part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the entire right sub-display device 10R is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Then, the next variable display is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position (deployed position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the right sub-display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R rotates clockwise (clockwise) along the circumferential direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (H), after stopping the rotation of the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position again. Moving. Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), the right sub-display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) along the circumferential direction.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to be movable with a left sub-display device 10L for displaying the hold icon 9A, and the hold (the hold icon 9C).
The right sub-display device 10R representing the above is provided. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the right sub-display device 10R represents the state of the hold (hold icon 9C) including the presence or absence of the hold (hold icon 9C). .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the hold icon 9A has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the right sub-display device 10R constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R and includes an annular portion R1 that can rotate in the circumferential direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C) has been described as having a display screen. That is, the right sub-display device 1
0R represented the hold (the hold icon 9C) using the display screen. However, the right sub-display device 10R may have a mode in which the display screen is not provided (the display screen is not used). For example, instead of the display screen, a light emitting device or the like that emits light so as to represent the reserved color may be used.
[Modification 2]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (hold icon 9C) has been described as having a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (hold icon 9C). However, the right sub-display device 10R may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C). For example, the shape of the right sub-display device 10R and the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C) may be completely different.
[Modification 3]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, it is assumed that the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C). explained. However, the hold icon 9A may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (hold icon 9C). For example, the shape of the hold icon 9A and the shape of the right sub-display device 10R may be completely different.
[Modification example 4]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C) has been described as having a rectangular shape or a circular shape. However, the right sub-display device 10R is not limited to such a shape. The right sub-display device 10R may have, for example, an elliptical shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, or another polygonal shape.
[Modification 5]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device. It is displayed on 10L. For example, decorative design (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C,
The right decorative symbol 8R) and the hold icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine that is configured to be movable and has a movable accessory that represents the hold.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
The movable accessory represents the state of the hold including the presence or absence of the hold.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2.
The movable accessory has a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3.
The hold icon has a shape corresponding to the shape of the movable accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3 or aspect B2-4.
The movable accessory has a circular shape.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5.
The movable accessory constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the movable accessory, and includes an annular portion that can rotate in the circumferential direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The hold movement effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. This hold movement effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 1
When the 01 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to read the corresponding image data and display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R).

[Holding movement production A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect A. In the hold movement production A, first
As shown in FIG. 100A, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.
C is displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. next,
As shown in FIG. 100 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 100 (
As shown in D) to FIG. 100 (J), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the left sub display. It moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the hold icon 9A is the left sub-display device 10.
From the first display position DP1 of L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, it starts to move in a curved shape in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. Hold icon 9
While A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A straddles the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Next, FIG. 100
As shown in (I), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, just as the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It is displayed in the upper left position. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10.
It may be displayed across the R display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the right hold icon 9A of the two hold icons 9A is the left sub display device 1.
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the 0L display screen. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Holding movement effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect B. In the hold movement production B, first
As shown in FIG. 101 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.
C is displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. next,
As shown in FIG. 101 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 101 (
As shown in D) to FIG. 101 (J), the rightmost hold icon 9A of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the left sub display. It moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the hold icon 9A is the left sub-display device 10.
It starts to move linearly from the first display position DP1 of L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the hold icon 9A displays the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed on the screen 7a. Hold icon 9
While A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A straddles the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) Starts to move linearly. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Next, FIG. 101
As shown in (I), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, just as the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It is displayed in the upper left position. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10.
It may be displayed across the R display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the right hold icon 9A of the two hold icons 9A is the left sub display device 1.
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the 0L display screen. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Holding movement effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect C. In the hold movement production C, first
As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.
C is displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. next,
As shown in FIG. 102 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 102 (
As shown in D) to FIG. 102 (I), the rightmost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the left sub display. It moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the hold icon 9A is the left sub-display device 10.
From the first display position DP1 of L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, it starts to move in a curved shape in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are lined up (left-right direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). Is in a different direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the left sub-display device 10 appears as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and disappeared.
The display of the hold icon 9A is turned off from the display screen of L. Further, in addition to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 or the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the hold icon 9A once disappeared is the right sub-display device 1.
The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as if jumping into the display screen of 0R from above.
A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed in. Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (H), the entire hold icon 9A is located at the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, as if the hold icon 9A jumped into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Is displayed. At the same time, 2 displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
The two hold icons 9A also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It moves to the second display position DP2 of, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the right hold icon 9A of the two hold icons 9A is the left sub display device 1.
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the 0L display screen. In this way, pending digestion is performed. Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Holding movement effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect D. In the hold movement production D, first
As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.
C is displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. next,
As shown in FIG. 103 (C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 103 (
As shown in D) to FIG. 103 (H), the rightmost hold icon 9A of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the left sub display. It moves from the first display position DP1 that displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the device 10L to the second display position DP2 that displays the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the hold icon 9A is the left sub-display device 10.
It starts to move linearly from the first display position DP1 of L toward the first display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally downward to the right). At this time, the left sub display device 10
The direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of L are lined up (left-right direction) is different from the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 (diagonally downward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the left sub display device 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1 and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed on the display screen of 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9A in a state where a part is missing) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), the hold icon 9A is the right sub-display device 1.
The entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R as if it jumped into the display screen of 0R. At the same time, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (H), the hold icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Also,
The two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right, and the hold icon 9A on the right side of the two hold icons 9A is the left sub display device 10L.
Is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of. In this way, pending digestion is performed.
Along with this hold digestion, the number of special figures 1 hold is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (2) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold digestion.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the left sub-display device 10
After the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of L and the first effect, the hold icon 9A is first displayed using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. A second effect displayed so as to move from the display position DP1 to the second display position DP2 for displaying the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and after the second effect, the right sub display device. A third effect in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of 10R can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is set by using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed so as to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed in the order of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. To. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the main display device 7
The hold icon 9A is displayed from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP by using the display screen 7a of.
It is displayed to move to 2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
It is displayed in the order of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the left sub-display device 10
The direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of L are lined up and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 in the second effect are different directions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed so as to move in a curved line from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. Ru. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold movement effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the hold movement effects A, B, and D of FIGS. 100, 101, and 103, it has been described that the hold icon 9A is displayed so as to continuously move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. However, the hold icon 9A is from the first display position DP1 to the second display position D.
It may be displayed so as to move intermittently to P2.
[Modification 2]
In the hold movement effects A, B, and D of FIGS. 100, 101, and 103, the hold icon 9A is described as being displayed so as to move linearly or curvedly from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. did. However, the method of moving the hold icon 9A is not limited to these.
[Modification 3]
In the hold movement effect of FIGS. 100 to 103, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C)
, Right decorative symbol 8R) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. For example, decorative design (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8)
C, the right decorative symbol 8R) and the hold icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).
[Modification example 4]
In the hold movement effect of FIGS. 100 to 103, the direction in which a plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are lined up (horizontal direction) and the hold icon 9A start moving from the first display position DP1. The direction (direction of arrow AD1) is different from that of the direction. However, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A are lined up (horizontal direction) and the hold icon 9A are in the first display position DP1.
The direction in which the movement starts from may be the same direction (for example, the horizontal direction).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine provided with a second display means for indicating the hold.
The first effect in which the hold icon is displayed at the first position in the first display means, and
After the first effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to the second position where the hold is displayed in the second display means by using the first display means. The second production to be done and
After the second effect, the second display means can execute the third effect in which the hold is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
Further equipped with a third display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to the second position by using the first display means and the third display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2.
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed in the order of the first display means and the third display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
Further equipped with a third display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
In the second effect, the hold icon is moved from the first position to the second position by using the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. Displayed in,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4.
In the second effect, the hold icon is the first display means, the third display means,
Displayed in the order of the second display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5.
The direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the first display means are lined up and the direction in which the hold icons start to move from the first position in the second effect are different directions.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-6.
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move in a curved line from the first position to the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The information display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. This information display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the information display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[The information display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed to red on hold. On the other hand, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C is
It corresponds to the current fluctuations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a fixed stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost at the same time as the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9 corresponding to the first storage area
A (red) is the reserved image 9C, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area is the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area is the second storage area. It becomes the corresponding pending image 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending image 9C that has been suspended and changed to red is displayed. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, ally character C
If RA wins, expectations for big hits will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot portions of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7".
It is stopped at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[The information display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed to red on hold. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, information on the degree of expectation for a jackpot corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed. Here, the message image MSG "so-so" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a fixed stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost at the same time as the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9 corresponding to the first storage area
A (red) moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and the message image MSG of "super hot" is displayed. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, "super hot" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, ally character C
If RA wins, expectations for big hits will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot portions of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7".
It is stopped and displayed at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the display on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[The information display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. In particular, the right sub-display device 10R is a circular display device that imitates a reserved image.
As a result, the right sub-display device 10R indicates the hold in the entire device. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Hold image 9A
It is a reserved image corresponding to the 1st to 4th storage areas of the 1st special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, 3 reserved images 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd storage areas are displayed. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed to red on hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a fixed stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost at the same time as the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9 corresponding to the first storage area
A (red) moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R turns red. At this time, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7 located on the back side has an effect as if the reserved image 9A (red) of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R.
It is executed using a. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R indicating the hold is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, ally character C
If RA wins, expectations for big hits will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the part covered by the left sub-display device 10L among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is
It is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the foot portion of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7".
It is stopped and displayed at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from red as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[The information display effect D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. In particular, the right sub-display device 10R is a circular display device that imitates a reserved image.
As a result, the right sub-display device 10R indicates the hold in the entire device. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Hold image 9A
It is a reserved image corresponding to the 1st to 4th storage areas of the 1st special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, 3 reserved images 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd storage areas are displayed. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area is changed to red on hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (loss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a fixed stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost at the same time as the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9 corresponding to the first storage area
A (red) moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R turns red. At this time, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7 located on the back side has an effect as if the reserved image 9A (red) of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R.
It is executed using a. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R indicating the hold is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), the battle / information addition effect is executed. This battle / information addition effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the expectation for the jackpot will increase. In addition, the battle / information addition effect is an effect of adding information for the fluctuation. Here, a triangular symbol is added to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, suggesting that it is even hotter than the red color alone. Of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 1
The image of the portion covered with 0L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the foot portion of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7".
It is stopped and displayed at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from red as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the information display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, information related to the fluctuation is displayed by using a right sub display device 10R different from the main display device 7 (FIGS. 104 (A), (B), (D), (E), and (F). ), FIG. 105
(A) (B) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 106 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F) (G), FIG. 107 (A) (B) (D) (E) ) (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the information related to the fluctuation becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape imitating a hold image, and shows the hold (FIGS. 106 and 107). According to this configuration, the information related to the fluctuation becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, information indicating the degree of expectation for a jackpot is displayed using the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R (FIGS. 104 (A), (B), (D), (E), (F), FIG. 105 (A
) (B) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 106 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F) (G), FIG.
7 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F) (G)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the degree of expectation for a big hit in the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the holding image 9 is used by using the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
A is displayed. According to this configuration, the reserved information becomes easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold shift effect is executed, and the first of the left sub-display device 10L is executed.
An effect as if the reserved image corresponding to the storage area has moved to the right sub-display device 10R is performed (FIGS. 104 (D), 105 (D), 106 (D), 107 (D)). According to the above, it becomes easy to understand that the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R corresponds to the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is used to produce the effect as if the reserved image corresponding to the first storage area of the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R. (Fig. 106 (D), Fig. 107 (D)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R corresponds to the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the information display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the right sub-display device 10R was designed to suggest the information of the fluctuation.
The left sub-display device 10L may suggest the information of the fluctuation.
[Modification 2]
In the above explanation, it is assumed that the reserved image is red, but the colors of the reserved image are blue, green, and so on.
Various colors such as purple and gold can be considered.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B4-1]
The first display device that can display images and produce effects,
A gaming machine provided with a second display device different from the first display device.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second display device is used and an effect control means for displaying information related to the fluctuation, which is the current fluctuation, is provided.

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1.
The second display device is a gaming machine characterized in that it has a shape imitating a reserved image.

[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the information related to the fluctuation is information indicating the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first display device can display a hold image corresponding to hold storage.

[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4.
The effect control means moves as if the reserved image in the first display device is shifted in accordance with the digestion of the reserved memory, and the reserved image corresponding to the next variation is moved to the second display device. A gaming machine characterized by performing production.

[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that the movement effect is performed using a third display device located behind the first display device and the second display device.

[Aspect B4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-6.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the reserved image is not displayed on the first display device, the reserved image is displayed on a display screen of a display device other than the first display device.

The hold icon interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. This hold icon interlocking effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and then analyzes the command.
When an instruction to execute the hold icon interlocking effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 or the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and An image is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon interlocking effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R). Change the position and tilt of.

[Hold icon interlocking effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect A. In the hold icon interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 108 (A), the third hold icon, which is the third from the right, will be described as the specific hold icon. Here, among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is referred to as a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 108 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the third hold icon 9A, which is the third from the right among the four hold icons 9A, is held and changed by look-ahead. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 108 (C), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is displayed.
), The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right, frames out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then right. It is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 108 (D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character of "heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) holds and digests. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again by. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right, frames out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then right. It is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. Specific image T
G moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. The specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A of the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbol is variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 108 (F) and 108 (G), the sub display device 10 (
In the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the shift movement of the hold icon 9A due to the hold digestion is performed again. Specifically, the specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right in order to be the hold, and the display of the left sub display device 10L is displayed. After frame-out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the specific hold icon 9A is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R after being framed out (after disappearing) from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A (new). ) Is displayed. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the specific image TG is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change while the specific hold icon is moving (always, the specific hold icon 9).
Located below A).

As shown in FIG. 108 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A is performed. In the left sub-display device 10L, the number of holds is set to 1 by the hold digestion, and one hold icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R and moves to the left.
That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R in which the specific hold icon 9A is once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (I), the specific image TG stops near the center of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are "3".
A reach with a temporary stop display is formed. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Hold icon interlocking effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect B. In the hold icon interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 109 (A), the third hold icon, which is the third from the right, is described as the specific hold icon. Here, among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is referred to as a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 109 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 109 (B), the third hold icon 9A, which is the third from the right among the four hold icons 9A, is held and changed by look-ahead. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 109 (C), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon due to hold digestion is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. A shift movement of 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is
It is continuously displayed so as to overlap the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 109 (D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character of "heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subjected to hold digestion. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved to the upper right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. The specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A of the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbol is variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 109 (F) and 109 (G), the sub display device 10 (
On the left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7, the hold icon 9 due to hold digestion
The shift movement of A is performed again. Specifically, the specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves in the upper right direction in order to be the hold, and the display of the left sub display device 10L is displayed. After frame-out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9
A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then the display screen 7a.
Frame out from the right side of. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is the specific hold icon 9
After frame-out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L in accordance with the movement of A, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved in the upper right direction, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific hold icon 9A (always located below the specific hold icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 109 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A is performed. In the left sub-display device 10L, the number of holds is set to 1 by the hold digestion, and one hold icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves to the left.
That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in which the specific hold icon 9A is once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (I), the specific image TG stops near the right end of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are "3".
A reach with a temporary stop display is formed. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Hold icon interlocking effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect C. In the hold icon interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 110 (A), the third hold icon, which is the third from the right, will be described as the specific hold icon. Here, among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is referred to as a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 110A, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The third hold icon 9A from the right, which is the third from the right of the four hold icons 9A, is held and changed by look-ahead. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon due to hold digestion is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. A shift movement of 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then draws a parabolic trajectory as shown in FIG. 110 (C). Move in the lower right direction and move to the right sub-display device 10R
Frame out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the 2nd to 4th
The hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A becomes the second hold hold icon 9A by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 110 (D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character of "heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subjected to hold digestion. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in a parabolic trajectory in the lower right direction, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. Left sub display device 10L
On the display screen of, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. The specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A of the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbol is variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 110 (F) and 110 (G), the sub display device 10 (
On the left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7, the hold icon 9 due to hold digestion
The shift movement of A is performed again. Specifically, the specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves in the upper right direction in order to be the hold, and the display of the left sub display device 10L is displayed. After frame-out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9
A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in the lower right direction in a parabolic trajectory, and is above the right sub-display device 10R from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Frame out. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after being framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in the lower right direction in a parabolic trajectory, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific hold icon 9A (always, the specific hold icon 9A).
Located below).

As shown in FIG. 110 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A is performed. In the left sub-display device 10L, the number of holds is set to 1 by the hold digestion, and one hold icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves upward.
That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in which the specific hold icon 9A is once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (I), the specific image TG stops near the lower right of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are "3".
A reach with a temporary stop display is formed. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Hold icon interlocking effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect D. In the hold icon interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 110 (A), the third hold icon, which is the third from the right, will be described as the specific hold icon. Here, among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is referred to as a specific hold icon. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

As shown in FIG. 111A, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The third hold icon 9A from the right, which is the third from the right of the four hold icons 9A, is held and changed by look-ahead. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

As shown in FIG. 111 (B), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon due to hold digestion is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7. A shift movement of 9A is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9C of the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and the left sub display device 10
After frame-out from the display screen of L, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A frame-in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then draws a parabolic trajectory (C).
As shown in, the display screen 7a moves in the lower right direction and is above the right sub-display device 10R.
Frame out from the bottom. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, and then stops at a predetermined position as shown in FIG. 111 (D), and the hold icon 9A is held. It becomes icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The specific image TG is a hold icon 9 on which the specific image TG overlaps.
It moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of A (specific hold icon 9A). Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A is the second hold hold icon 9 due to the shift movement.
It becomes A.

As shown in FIG. 111 (D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character of "heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subjected to hold digestion. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the hold icon 9C of the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and then the display of the main display device 7 is displayed. It is displayed on the screen 7a. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in a parabolic trajectory in the lower right direction, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Then, the right sub-display device 10
It is displayed on the R display screen. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9
A frames in from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, stops at a predetermined position, and becomes the hold icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. The specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A of the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbol is variedly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 110 (F) and 110 (G), the sub display device 10 (
On the left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7, the hold icon 9 due to hold digestion
The shift movement of A is performed again. Specifically, the hold icon 9C of the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The specific hold icon 9A of the first hold (far right) displayed on the left sub display device 10L has moved to the upper right direction and framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in order to be held. After that, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, and then moves in the lower right direction in a parabolic trajectory.
Above the right sub-display device 10R, the frame is out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, and then stops at a predetermined position to become the hold icon 9C. At this time, the specific image TG is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after the specific hold icon 9A is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. That is, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A is not linked on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

As shown in FIG. 111 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A is performed. In the left sub-display device 10L, the number of holds is set to 1 by the hold digestion, and one hold icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves upward.
That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in which the specific hold icon 9A is once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (I), the specific image TG stops near the lower right of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are "3".
A reach with a temporary stop display is formed. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon interlocking effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the left sub-display device 10L
The specific image TG for the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed and the specific hold icon which is one of the hold icons displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
Is displayed, and after the specific hold icon disappears from the left sub-display device 10L, a third effect in which the specific image TG is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R can be executed. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device 10L and the left sub display device 10L The second effect in which the specific image TG is displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the hold icons displayed in, and the main after the specific hold icon disappears from the left sub display device 10L. A third effect in which the specific image TG is displayed on the display device 7 and
Can be executed. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, in the second effect, after the specific image TG is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, it is linked to the movement of the specific hold icon. The specific image TG moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, in the second effect, after the specific image TG is displayed so as to overlap the specific hold icon 9A, the display position of the specific image TG is changed. It changes and is displayed in a position close to the specific hold icon. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, in the third effect, after the specific hold icon 9A disappears from the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9A is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. After being displayed and disappearing from the right sub-display device 10R, the right sub-display device 10R
The specific image TG is displayed in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111, in the third effect, after the specific hold icon 9A disappears from the left sub display device 10L, the main display device After the specific hold icon 9A is displayed on the 7 and disappears from the main display device 7, the specific image TG is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, in the third effect, when the specific hold icon 9A is put on hold, the left sub display device 10L to the right sub display device 1
After moving to 0R and moving to the right sub-display device 10R, it disappears from the right sub-display device 10R by moving toward the outside of the right sub-display device 10R, and the specific hold icon 9A of the right sub-display device 10R is displayed. A specific image TG appears from the disappeared position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111,
In the third effect, when the specific hold icon 9A is put on hold, the left sub display device 10L
After moving to the main display device 7 and moving to the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9A of the main display device 7 disappears from the main display device 7 by moving toward the outside of the main display device 7. A specific image TG appears from the disappeared position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the specific image T
G suggests information related to the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon interlocking effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, the specific image TG is assumed to represent "heat". However, the specific image TG may be a character image other than "heat". For example, the specific image TG may be "no way", "chance", "extreme heat", or the like. Then, the degree of expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon may be changed depending on the content of the character. That is, the difference in the degree of expectation may be suggested depending on the content of the character.

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 is illustrated, but the hold icon interlocking effect may be the hold icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B may perform the above effect.

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, the hold icon 9A is assumed not to change its orientation when moving. However, in the hold icon interlocking effect, the orientation of the hold icon 9A may change when it is moved. For example, the hold icon 9A may move while rotating. Further, the hold icon 9A may change in size or blink when moved.

[Modification example 4]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, when the hold icon 9A moves, the display does not have to be maintained in the part where the display is maintained, and the display is maintained in the part where the display is not maintained. You may.

[Modification 5]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, the hold icon 9A may be displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. Further, the specific image TG may also be displayed straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the hold icon interlocking effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the hold icon interlocking effects A to D may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
The first display means capable of displaying an image and
A gaming machine provided with a second display means capable of displaying an image.
The first effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the first display means, and
A second effect in which a specific image is displayed for a specific hold icon, which is one of the hold icons displayed in the first display means, and
After the specific hold icon disappears from the first display means, a third effect of displaying the specific image on the second display means can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1.
In the second effect, after the specific image is displayed on the first display means, the specific image moves in conjunction with the movement of the specific hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2.
In the second effect, after the specific image is displayed so as to overlap the specific hold icon,
The display position of the specific image changes and is displayed at a position close to the specific hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
In the third effect, after the specific hold icon disappears from the first display means, the specific hold icon is displayed on the second display means and disappears from the second display means.
The specific image is displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4.
In the third effect, when the specific hold icon is put on hold, the first display means moves to the second display means, and after moving to the second display means, the second display means. By moving toward the outside of the display means, the specific image disappears from the second display means, and the specific image appears from the position where the specific hold icon disappears from the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5.
The specific image suggests information related to the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The pending change suggestion effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. This pending change suggestion effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern (for example, during the pseudo-continuous effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold change suggestion image effect, the ROM 1
The corresponding image data is read from 03, and the display screen 7 of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is read.
This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screens of a and the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).

[Holding change suggestion production A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect A. In the hold change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9
The first hold change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of hold change of C is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a ally character CRA, which is an image representing a ally character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, ally character CR
A performs an operation such as throwing a ball BG at the enemy character CRB. The ball BG, which is an image representing the ball, is included in the first pending change suggestion image HG1. Next, FIG. 112 (D)
), The ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA against the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is executed. Specifically, an image showing that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hit the enemy character CRB and was able to damage the enemy character CRA is displayed. That is, an image showing that the predetermined effect is successful is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the enemy character CRB is damaged and performs an operation that makes him regret. Here, a character image representing the line "Done!" Of the enemy character CRB is displayed. Next, FIG. 112 (
As shown in G), the enemy character CRB is displayed so as to move downward while rotating slightly counterclockwise from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), the enemy character CRB is displayed so as to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The enemy character CRB is displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (I), on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the enemy character CRB collides with the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9C
Changes on hold. Specifically, the hold icon 9C changes from "white" to the enemy character CR.
It changes to "red", which is the color of B. Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Holding change suggestion effect B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect B. In the hold change suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9
The first hold change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of hold change of C is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a ally character CRA, which is an image representing a ally character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, ally character CR
A performs an operation such as throwing a ball BG at the enemy character CRB. The ball BG, which is an image representing the ball, is included in the first pending change suggestion image HG1. Next, FIG. 113 (D)
), The ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA against the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is not executed. Specifically, an image showing that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, but the ball BG is bounced off by the enemy character CRA is displayed. That is, an image indicating that the predetermined effect has failed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the enemy character CRB is damaged and performs an operation that makes him regret. Here, a character image representing a line of the enemy character CRB with "Kikanuwa!" Is displayed. Next, FIG. 113 (
As shown in G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second pending change suggestion image H
The G2 display disappears.

[Holding change suggestion production C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect C. In the hold change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9
The first hold change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of hold change of C is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a ally character CRA, which is an image representing a ally character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire ball BG is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, ally character CR
A performs an action like throwing a ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA flies toward the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is executed. Specifically, the ball BG is the main so that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA jumps into the left sub-display device 10L and moves toward the second hold icon 9A from the right among the three hold icons 9A. It is displayed across the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the left sub-display device 10L. That is, an image showing that the predetermined effect is successful is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA collides with the second hold icon 9A from the right among the three hold icons 9A of the left sub-display device 10L, and the hold icon 9A is held. Icon 9A changes on hold. Specifically, the hold icon 9A changes from "white" to "red", which is the same color as the ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs an operation that pleases the ally character CRA. Here, a character image representing the dialogue of the ally character CRA, "Yeah!", Is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (I), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Holding change suggestion effect D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect D. In the hold change suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific object. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9
The first hold change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of hold change of C is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a ally character CRA, which is an image representing a ally character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image suggesting a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire ball BG is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, ally character CR
A performs an action like throwing a ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA flies toward the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is not executed. Specifically, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the left sub-display device 10L, and an image showing that the ball BG has bounced off is displayed. That is, an image indicating that the predetermined effect has failed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs an operation that is regrettable. Here, a character image representing the line "No!" Of the ally character CRA is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending change suggestion image effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the left sub-display device 10
The first effect in which the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed on L (right sub-display device 10R), and the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) after the first display effect. The second effect of displaying the first pending change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility can be executed. Then, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 includes at least a part of an image suggesting the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, after the second effect, the first hold change suggestion suggests the possibility of the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9C) being held. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the second pending change suggestion image HG2 different from the image HG1 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggests, at least in part, the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). Includes images to be used. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is executed. is there. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, the hold icon 9A (hold icon 9C) is displayed on at least a part of the second hold change suggestion image HG2 in the third effect. Display to move toward the current position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, after the third effect, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.
It is possible to carry out the production of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and
It is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 115, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is not executed. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pending change suggestion image effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, but the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is displayed, for example, on the left sub display. The display may be performed on the device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, other display devices, or the like. Further, the display may be performed across a plurality of display devices.
[Modification 2]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, an image (enemy character CRB, ball BG) in which a part of the first hold change suggestion image HG1 suggests a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). However, the entire first hold change suggestion image HG1 may be an image suggesting the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification 3]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, an image (enemy character CRB, ball BG) in which a part of the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggests a mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). However, the entire second hold change suggestion image HG2 may be an image suggesting the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification example 4]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG2 are continuously displayed. For example, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is displayed. The second pending change suggestion image HG2 may be displayed after the disappearance of.
[Modification 5]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG2 are related images. For example, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG1 and the second hold change suggestion image HG2. Suggestion image An image that is completely unrelated to HG2 may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of effects.
The first effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the display means, and
After the first display effect, a second effect of displaying a first hold change suggestion image suggesting the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon can be executed.
The first hold change suggestion image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting a post-hold change aspect of the hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1.
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which a second hold change suggestion image different from the first hold change suggestion image is displayed, which suggests the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon. Is,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2.
The second hold change suggestion image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting a post-hold change aspect of the hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or aspect B6-3.
The second hold change suggestion image is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4.
In the third effect, at least a part of the second hold change suggestion image is displayed so as to move toward the position where the hold icon is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4 or aspect B6-5.
After the third effect, the fourth aspect of changing the hold icon from the first aspect to the second aspect.
Is possible to produce
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-7]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or aspect B6-3.
The second hold change suggestion image is an image suggesting that the hold change of the hold icon is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern display mode effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. This decorative symbol display mode effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold change suggestion image effect, the ROM 1
The corresponding image data is read from 03, and the display screen 7 of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is read.
This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screens of a and the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern display mode production A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect A. In the decorative pattern display mode effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). Display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game
In, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are
They are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times (number of changes) of the decorative symbol variation effect during this jackpot game is the 99th. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. As a result, the 99th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.
Is executed. The number of decorative symbol fluctuation effects (number of fluctuations) during this jackpot game is 10.
This is the 0th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the 100th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed.
That is, the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
And the display of the right decorative pattern 8R disappears once. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (H), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at the advanced position and stops in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed again. The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. The number of decorative symbol variation effects (number of variations) during this jackpot game is the 101st. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted from the horizontal direction at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. Left decorative pattern 8L
And the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are inclined lines L inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.
It is displayed side by side along N2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the 101st decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the second from the horizontal direction.
They are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern display mode production B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect B. In the decorative pattern display mode effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). Display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game
In, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are
They are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times (number of changes) of the decorative symbol variation effect during this jackpot game is the 99th. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. As a result, the 99th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.
Is executed. The number of decorative symbol fluctuation effects (number of fluctuations) during this jackpot game is 10.
This is the 0th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the 100th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed.
That is, the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
And the display of the right decorative pattern 8R disappears once. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (H), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at the advanced position and stops in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed again. The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. The number of decorative symbol variation effects (number of variations) during this jackpot game is the 101st. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the horizontal direction, respectively. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the 101st decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the horizontal direction, respectively. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern display mode production C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect C. In the decorative pattern display mode effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). Further, although not shown in FIG. 118 (A), the first movable accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L, right movable accessory 14R) is also in the retracted position (home position).
Is located in. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, “7”) to form a reach. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. next,
As shown in FIG. 118 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, at the timing immediately before the changing intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Disappears once, and the button image BTN and the operation promotion image SSG are displayed. Operation promotion image The SSG is a character image of "press" and prompts the player to operate (press operation).

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the left movable accessory 14L moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), the left movable accessory 14
L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advance position (deployment position) to form one logo, and stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Also, the second
The movable accessory 15 stops at an advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined to stand still. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate counterclockwise at the advanced position and stop in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The inclination angles at this time are shown in FIGS. 116 (H) and 117 (H) described above.
The angle is the same as that of the second movable accessory 15. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (G), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate clockwise at the advanced position, return to the horizontal position, and stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (H), the left movable accessory 14L moves to the left from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (I), the left movable accessory 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the right movable accessory 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Also, the second
The movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R
And is the same number (here, "7"), and the decision is stopped in the form of a jackpot. Left decorative pattern 8L
The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect D. In the decorative symbol display mode effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used. The decorative pattern variation effect (variation display) is executed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 116 (I), the second movable accessory 15 stops in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction at the advance position.
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted from the horizontal direction at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R have the same numbers (here, “7”). It will stop in a big hit manner. At this time, similarly to FIG. 116 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side on the lower side of the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted from the horizontal direction at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 remains unchanged, and the first movable accessory 14
The second movable accessory 15 rotates clockwise at the advanced position, returns to the horizontal position, and stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the left movable accessory 14L is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
Move to the right toward the center of. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves to the right toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advance position (deployment position) to form one logo, and the display screen of the main display device 7 is formed. Stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 stops at an advance position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state of covering a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined to stand still. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (G), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate counterclockwise at the advanced position and stop in a state of being tilted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The inclination angle at this time is the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 of FIGS. 119 (A) and 119 (B) described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate clockwise at the advanced position, return to the horizontal position, and stop. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (I), the left movable accessory 14L moves to the left from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Also,
The right movable accessory 14R moves to the right from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, FIG. 11
As shown in 9 (J), the left movable accessory 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the right movable accessory 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern display mode effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side along the first direction (horizontal line L1). A second display mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed side by side in a second direction (inclined line LN2) different from the first direction. The display mode is feasible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
As shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment changes from the first display mode to the second display mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, and is the second. Is arranged along the second direction (inclination line LN2) in the display mode of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, at the time of a big hit, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advance position and are united in the first direction (horizontal line LN1). ), Then the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R in the combined state are rotated and arranged along the second direction (inclined line LN2). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, at the time of a big hit, the second movable accessory 15 is oriented in the same direction as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. Be placed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern display mode effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects A to C of FIGS. 116 to 118, in the first display mode, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction, horizontal line L1). Although they are displayed side by side along the above, the first direction is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be any direction.
[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol display modes A, B, and D of FIGS. 116, 117, and 119, in the second display mode, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction). , The horizontal line LN1) is displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle, but the second direction is not limited to such a direction and is different from the first direction. It can be in any direction.
[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol display modes A, B, and D of FIGS. 116, 117, and 119, in the second display mode, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction). , The horizontal line LN1) is displayed side by side along the inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle, but the inclined angle of the inclined line LN2 can be freely set.
[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects A and B of FIGS. 116 and 117, the predetermined condition for changing from the first display mode to the second display mode is that the number of fluctuations is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10) in the jackpot game.
(0 times) is reached, but the predetermined conditions are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.
[Modification 5]
In the decorative symbol display mode effect of FIGS. 116 to 119, the decorative symbols are arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, and in the second direction (inclined line LN2) in the second display mode. The movable accessory arranged along the line is the second movable accessory 15, but the first movable accessory 1
4 (left movable accessory 14L, right movable accessory 14R) or other movable accessory may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
A first display mode in which a plurality of the decorative symbols are displayed side by side along a first direction, and a plurality of the decorative symbols are displayed side by side in a second direction different from the first direction. The second display mode is feasible.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2.
The predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations reaches the predetermined number of times in the jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3.
Further equipped with a first movable accessory configured to be movable,
The first movable accessory is arranged along the first direction in the first display mode, and is arranged along the second direction in the second display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4.
A second movable accessory configured to be movable,
Further equipped with a third movable accessory configured to be movable,
At the time of a big hit, the second movable accessory and the third movable accessory are united at a predetermined position and arranged along the first direction, and then the second movable object in the combined state. The accessory and the third movable accessory rotate and are arranged along the second direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-5.
At the time of the jackpot, the first movable accessory is arranged along the same direction as the second movable accessory and the third movable accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. This decorative symbol variation effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18
Is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10. This decorative pattern variation effect is an effect that performs a variation effect different from the normal decorative pattern variation effect. In the normal variation effect of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern fluctuates downward.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. In the decorative symbol variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), an effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In the effect before the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol change, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves from the variation start position to the right where the decorative symbol 8C is located, and fluctuates so as to collide with (contact) the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative symbol 8C. In addition, it should be noted.
The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbol starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the effect of starting the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol is performed. In this intermediate decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C moves to the right where the decorative symbol 8R is located from the variation start position based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8L collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8C. It is a production that fluctuates so as to hit (touch). In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), the right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R fluctuates so as to move to the right based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8C collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8R. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R moves to the right by a predetermined distance and then temporarily stops at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, to the left, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the vehicle has moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (E), a loss display effect is performed. In this loss display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above left decorative symbol change start effect, middle decorative symbol change start effect, and right decorative symbol change start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display the stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7"
Is converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. In the decorative symbol variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), an effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In the effect before the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol change, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves while rotating to the right where the decorative symbol 8C is located from the variation start position, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative symbol 8C. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbol starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the effect of starting the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol is performed. In this intermediate decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C moves from the variation start position while rotating to the right where the decorative symbol 8R is located, based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8L collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8C. It is an effect that fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), the right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R fluctuates so as to move while rotating to the right based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8C collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8R. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R moves to the right by a predetermined distance and then temporarily stops at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, to the left, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the vehicle has moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (E), a loss display effect is performed. In this loss display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above left decorative symbol change start effect, middle decorative symbol change start effect, and right decorative symbol change start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display the stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7"
Is converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. In the decorative symbol variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), an effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In the effect before the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol change, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves while rotating to the right where the decorative symbol 8C is located from the variation start position, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, after the decorative symbol 8L collides with the decorative symbol 8C, an explosion image ZD1 showing the state of explosion is displayed, and the decorative symbol 8L explodes and is temporarily stopped at the place. The hold icon 9A
Is reduced by one due to the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the effect of starting the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol is performed. In this intermediate decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C moves from the variation start position while rotating to the right where the decorative symbol 8R is located, based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8L collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8C. It is an effect that fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, after the decorative symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the decorative symbol 8C explodes and temporarily stops at the place.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R fluctuates so as to move while rotating to the right based on the fact that the decorative symbol 8C collides with (contacts) the decorative symbol 8R. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R moves to the right by a predetermined distance, then the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R explodes and temporarily stops at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, to the left, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the vehicle has moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), a loss display effect is performed. In this loss display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the above left decorative symbol change start effect, middle decorative symbol change start effect, and right decorative symbol change start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display the stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7"
Is converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. In the decorative symbol variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In the effect before the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol change, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L is rotated at the variation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the state of explosion is shown. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbol starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), the left decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol sublimation effect, after the decorative symbol 8L explodes, it flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the effect of starting the variation of the intermediate decorative symbol is performed. In this intermediate decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C is rotated at the variation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the state of explosion is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the sublimation effect of the intermediate decorative pattern is performed. In this medium decorative pattern sublimation effect, after the decorative pattern 8L explodes, it flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (F), the right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R is rotated at the variation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the state of explosion is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), the right decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol sublimation effect, after the decorative symbol 8L explodes, it flies (moves) upward while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a reach that fluctuates at high speed. The reach display represents the so-called reach state. In this reach effect, the character ARA performs various effects. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the reach effect, and a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, or the like may be performed.

In the decorative symbol variation effects A to D, the same variation is performed from the left decorative symbol variation start effect to the reach effect. It should be noted that these effects may be performed with different fluctuations instead of the same fluctuation. For example, the left decorative symbol variation start effect, the middle decorative symbol variation start effect, and the right decorative symbol variation start effect may be performed with different variations.

[Modification example]
In the decorative symbol variation effect D, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are designed to fly upward, but they may fly in a direction different from the upward direction, or each may fly in a different direction. You can go. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect D, the decorative symbols 8L, 8
The order in which C and 8R fly upward was the order of decorative symbol 8L, decorative symbol 8C, and decorative symbol 8R, but the order is not limited to this, and there are various types such as decorative symbol 8C, decorative symbol 8R, and decorative symbol 8L. It may be in the order of.
In the decorative symbol variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are converted into different symbols after all three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped.
Not limited to this, if the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, it may be converted to a different symbol before the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates, and if the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, it may be converted to a different symbol before the decorative symbol 8R fluctuates. It may be converted to a different pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the above decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves in the direction of the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8
By hitting C, the decorative symbol 8C starts to fluctuate. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a new variation pattern of the decorative pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves in the direction of the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8
Explodes when hitting C. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 8C and improve the interest of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol 8L moves in the direction of the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8
After the explosion occurs when hitting C, the decorative symbol 8L different from that before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the suspension of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 8L and improve the interest of the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol 8R is displayed before the effect that the decorative symbols 8L and 8C start to change, and the effect that the decorative symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R is the decorative symbol 8.
The effect that C starts to fluctuate and the decorative symbol 8R starts to fluctuate is performed after the effect that the decorative symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R, and the effect that the decorative symbol 8R starts to fluctuate is decoration. In the production in which the symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R, the decorative symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 8R and improve the interest of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation effect, in the effect in which the decorative symbol 8C collides with the decorative symbol 8R, the decorative symbol 8C explodes when it collides with the decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the suspension of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 8R and improve the interest of the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the first decorative pattern.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second decorative pattern.
The third display effect is an effect in which the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the first decorative symbol collides with the second decorative symbol.
The fifth display effect is an effect in which the second decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and after the first display effect and the second display effect, the third display effect is performed.
After the third display effect, the fourth display effect is performed, after the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect is performed, and in the fifth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. When the first decorative symbol collides with the second decorative symbol in the display effect, the variation of the second decorative symbol is started.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-2]
The gaming machine described in ZD-1.
In the combination effect, in the fourth display effect, the first decorative symbol explodes when it hits the second decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-3]
The gaming machine described in ZD-2.
In the combination effect, in the fourth display effect, after the first decorative symbol explodes, a decorative symbol different from that before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of ZD-1 to ZD-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed, and as one of the plurality of display effects, a seventh display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, an eighth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying a third decorative pattern.
The seventh display effect is an effect in which the second decorative symbol collides with the third decorative symbol.
The eighth display effect is an effect in which the third decorative symbol starts to fluctuate.
The combination effect includes the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, the sixth display effect, and the seventh display effect. In some cases, the display effect of the above and the eighth display effect may be included.
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed before the third display effect and the fifth display effect, and the seventh display effect is performed after the fifth display effect. The eighth display effect is performed after the seventh display effect, and in the eighth display effect, the second decorative symbol collides with the third decorative symbol in the seventh display effect. As a result, the variation of the third decorative pattern is started.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-5]
The gaming machine described in ZD-4.
In the combination effect, in the seventh display effect, the second decorative symbol explodes when it hits the third decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The first decorative pattern rotates and crushes the second decorative pattern.
○ Assuming that the direction in which the first decorative symbol collides with the second decorative symbol is the first direction, if the first decorative symbol fluctuates in a second direction different from the first direction after the explosion, A predetermined production (reach production) is performed. In this case, it fluctuates in a direction different from that at the time of normal fluctuation.

Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. Pseudo continuous production A
~ D is an example of what is different in the configuration of the temporary stop effect in the pseudo-ream. This pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[Pseudo-continuous production A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. on the other hand,
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), the combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, the message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L1, "5" is stopped at the lower stage of the left effect symbol 8L, and "5" is at the upper stage of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R.
Is stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L2, "8" stops in the upper row of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C, and "8" is in the lower row of the right effect symbol 8R.
Is stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (F), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the continuous combo period ends), FIG. 124 (F)
) To FIG. 124 (C), the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect become shorter. The shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

When the predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 124 (G). Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7".
It is stopped at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Pseudo-continuous production B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. on the other hand,
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, the message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L1, "5" is stopped at the lower stage of the left effect symbol 8L, and "5" is at the upper stage of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R.
Is stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (E), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by line L2, the special symbol "Speed Up" is stopped in the upper row of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C, and the special symbol "Speed Up" is stopped in the lower row of the right effect symbol 8R. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the continuous combo period ends), FIG. 125 (F).
) To FIG. 125 (C), the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. Further, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened by arranging the special symbols "Speed Up" on the predetermined line. And
The shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

When the predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 125 (G). Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7".
It is stopped at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Pseudo-continuous production C]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. on the other hand,
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), the combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, the message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop with the same color combination. Here, the left production design 8L is "
"0", the middle effect symbol 8C is "4", the right effect symbol 8R is "6", and these effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are all blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop with the same color combination. Here, the left production design 8L is "
7 ”, the middle effect symbol 8C is“ 1 ”, the right effect symbol 8R is“ 9 ”, and these effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are all red.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), FIG. 126 (F).
) To FIG. 126 (C), the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect become shorter. In addition, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of a specific color (for example, red) are aligned, the interval time and the fluctuation time may be shortened. The shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

When the predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 126 (G). Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7".
It is stopped at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Pseudo-continuous production D]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. on the other hand,
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, the message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the special symbol "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continue", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the special symbol "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continue", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the continuous combo period ends), FIG. 127 (F).
) To FIG. 127 (C), the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect become shorter. The shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

When the predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 127 (G). Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7".
It is stopped at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pseudo-continuous production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the continuous combo is entered, the temporary stop effect and the revariation effect are repeated until the continuous combo period ends (FIGS. 124 (B) to (F), 125 (B)).
~ (F), FIGS. 126 (B) to (F), FIGS. 127 (B) to (F)). Moreover, the repetition time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the fluctuation again with a temporary stop is shortened. According to this configuration, the pseudo-ream continues in a certain period, and the interval between the repetitions of the pseudo-ream becomes shorter, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect become shorter. According to this configuration, since the repetition interval of the pseudo-ream becomes shorter, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the temporary stop effect, a configuration in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in a predetermined arrangement is illustrated (FIGS. 124 (C) (F) and 125 (C) (F). )).
According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the repetition of the pseudo-ream, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which a special symbol is temporarily stopped is illustrated in the temporary stop effect (FIGS. 125 (E) and 127 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the repetition of the pseudo-ream, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the temporary stop effect, a configuration is illustrated in which the repetition time is shortened by temporarily stopping the special symbol (FIG. 125 (E)). According to this configuration, the change in the repetition time becomes easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the shorter the repetition time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot. According to this configuration, the repetition of the pseudo-ren becomes interesting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pseudo-continuous production.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the configuration for shortening the repetition time of the pseudo-ream repeated in a predetermined period has been described, but the configuration for increasing the repetition time of the pseudo-ream may be used. Alternatively, it may be configured to be longer or shorter.

[Modification 2]
In the above, both the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the fluctuation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened, but at least one of the interval time and the fluctuation time is shortened. It may be a configuration that goes on.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
It is a gaming machine capable of executing a repetitive pseudo-ream effect in which the effect symbol that has started the fluctuation is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-ream that starts the fluctuation again is repeated for a predetermined period.
The repetitive pseudo-continuous effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the repetitive time from when the effect symbol starts to fluctuate to when the effect symbol starts to fluctuate again after the temporary stop changes within the predetermined period.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
The repetitive pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation time, which is a time from the start of the fluctuation to the temporary stop, and a time from the temporary stop to the start of the fluctuation, which constitutes the repetition time. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the interval times changes.

[Aspect C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
In the repetitive pseudo-continuous production, a gaming machine characterized in that the production symbols are temporarily stopped in a predetermined arrangement.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3.
In the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, a gaming machine characterized in that a special symbol among the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-4.
In the repetitive pseudo-continuous production, a gaming machine characterized in that the repetitive time changes due to a temporary stop of the special symbol.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5.
In the repetitive pseudo-continuous production, the larger the change in the repetitive time, the higher the expectation for the jackpot.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6.
The feature is that the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect can be performed on the display screen of the first display device, and the hold image corresponding to the hold storage can be displayed on the display screen of the second display device different from the first display device. A game machine to play.

The decorative design facing effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. This decorative symbol facing effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18
Is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative design facing production A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect A. In the decorative symbol facing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), a low-speed variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative symbol 8L fluctuates downward (low-speed movement), and the decorative symbol 8C
, 8R is an effect of low-speed fluctuation (low-speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, decorative patterns 8C, 8R
Fluctuates upward at the same speed in a lined state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which have been fluctuating at low speed, are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "7 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8
C is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols", and decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays of "7 88", indicating a chance eye (chance up display) in which the jackpot expectation level is increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, the character CRZ
E performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative design facing production B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect B. In the decorative symbol facing effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), a low-speed variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative symbol 8L fluctuates downward (low-speed movement), and the decorative symbol 8C
, 8R is an effect of low-speed fluctuation (low-speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8R. Not limited to this, the decorative pattern 8
R may fluctuate upward at a speed faster than that of the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which have been fluctuating at low speed, are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "7 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8
C is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols", and decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays of "7 88", indicating a chance eye (chance up display) in which the jackpot expectation level is increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (D), the decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, the character CRZ
E performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative design facing production C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect C. In the decorative symbol facing effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), a low-speed variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative symbol 8L fluctuates downward (low-speed movement), and the decorative symbol 8C
, 8R is an effect of low-speed fluctuation (low-speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8R. Not limited to this, the decorative pattern 8
R may fluctuate upward at a speed faster than that of the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R, which have been fluctuating at low speed, are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed slightly above the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols". In this case, decorative patterns 8L, 8C,
8R is a stop display of "7 8 8", and indicates a chance eye (chance up display) in which the jackpot expectation level increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (D), the decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, the character CRZ
E performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative design facing production D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect D. In the decorative symbol facing effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), a low-speed variation effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative symbol 8L fluctuates downward (low-speed movement), and the decorative symbol 8C
, 8R is an effect of low-speed fluctuation (low-speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative symbol 8R. Not limited to this, the decorative pattern 8
R may fluctuate upward at a speed faster than that of the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R, which have been fluctuating at a low speed, are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in parallel slightly above the reach line LN.
Further, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance-up symbol. This chance-up symbol is a symbol that was not included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R were fluctuating at the time of the decorative symbol variation effect, and this decorative symbol temporary stop effect At times, it is a symbol included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. When this chance-up symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a so-called chance eye (chance-up display), indicating that the jackpot expectation level has increased. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "7 symbols", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at "8 symbols".

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, the character CRZ
E performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Modification example]
In the above decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbols 8L are variablely displayed downward, at that time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variablely displayed upward, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. The effect of the above may be repeated a plurality of times, and the higher the number of repetitions, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern facing effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed downward, at that time, the decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed upward, and then the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the variable effect in which the decorative symbols move in opposite directions (opposite directions) is performed, it is possible to dynamically perform the variable effect such that the decorative symbols move away from each other or approach each other in the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol facing effect, a chance-up display is performed depending on the stop mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, after the dynamic variation effect, the chance-up display that is advantageous for the player is performed, so that the player can be continuously given a hobby until the decorative pattern stops from the variation effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbols 8L are variablely displayed downward, at that time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variablely displayed upward, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the variable effect in which the decorative symbols move in opposite directions (opposite directions) is performed, it is possible to dynamically perform the variable effect such that the decorative symbols move away from each other or approach each other in the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed downward, and at that time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variablely displayed upward, but the moving speeds of the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R are different. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a dynamic variation effect by the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8C. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above decorative symbol facing effect, the decorative symbols 8L are variablely displayed downward, at that time, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variablely displayed upward, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. The effect of is repeated multiple times, and the greater the number of repetitions, the higher the expectation of a big hit. According to this configuration, the more the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate, the more happy the player is, so that the interest of the fluctuating effect using the decorative symbols can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the first decorative pattern in the first direction.
The second display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the second decorative symbol in the second direction opposite to the first direction.
The third display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZE-1.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, a chance-up display is performed by a stop display mode including the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZE-1 or the aspect ZE-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying the third decorative pattern in the second direction.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZE-3.
The second decorative symbol in the second display effect and the third decorative symbol in the fourth display effect have different speeds of moving in the second direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZE-1 to ZE-4.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then a series of effects in which the third display effect is performed are repeated a plurality of times, and the number of repetitions. The higher the number, the higher the expectation of big hits,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ In the case of a jackpot, a jackpot symbol array including the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be formed on a predetermined line, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be formed in the third display effect. At least one of the decorative symbols of is not stopped and displayed on a predetermined line.
○ In the third display effect, the first decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed is a decorative symbol that is not included in the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the first display effect.

The decorative symbol look-ahead display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.
This decorative symbol look-ahead display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the pseudo-continuous effect), during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 is the sub control board 9.
When the instruction to execute the pending change suggestion image effect is included by analyzing the variation effect start command received from 0, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect A]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect A. In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 132A, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-read display effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 132 (A),
The fourth hold on the far left is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the loss mode "472". .. The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5",
The images representing "7" and "9" are "red", and the images representing the numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image, and the whole is represented by "red". The specific target is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but characters, figures, and so on.
It also includes abstract things such as symbols and conceptual things whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the "red" images representing the numbers "3" and "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8) are used as a look-ahead effect.
All of R) are "red" images, and one of them is a decorative design (left decorative design 8).
L) is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. Specified left decorative pattern 8LZ and specified medium decorative pattern 8C
After the temporary stop display of Z, a "red" image representing the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "red", and two of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9A
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to Z, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the specific middle decorative symbol 8CZ, and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. It is a "red" image and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the specific hold icon 9CZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R by the shift movement.
Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to produce a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that is the target of pre-reading. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 132
In (J), the state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown.
The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect B]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect B. In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-read display effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 133 (A),
The fourth hold on the far left is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the loss mode "472". .. The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5",
The images representing "7" and "9" are "red", and the images representing the numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is an image that combines a smiling face image and a square image with the characters "chance" under the smiling face image, and is the whole. Is represented by "red". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is,
The specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the "red" images representing the numbers "3" and "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation three times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ,
As a look-ahead effect, three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R)
) Are all "red" images, and one of them is a decorative design (left decorative design 8L).
) Is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. Specified left decorative pattern 8LZ and specified medium decorative pattern 8C
After the temporary stop display of Z, a "red" image representing the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "red", and two of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9A
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to Z, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the specific middle decorative symbol 8CZ, and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. It is a "red" image and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the specific hold icon 9CZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R by the shift movement.
Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to produce a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that is the target of pre-reading. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 133
In (J), the state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown.
The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual. In addition, it should be noted.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect C]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect C. In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-read display effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 134 (A),
The fourth hold on the far left is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the loss mode "472". .. The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5",
The images representing "7" and "9" are "red", and the images representing the numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ on which the specific image is represented is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image, and the whole is represented by "blue". The specific target is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but characters, figures, and so on.
It also includes abstract things such as symbols and conceptual things whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the "blue" images representing the numbers "8" and "6" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8) are used as a look-ahead effect.
All of R) are "blue" images, and one of them is a decorative design (left decorative design 8).
L) is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. Specified left decorative pattern 8LZ and specified medium decorative pattern 8C
After the temporary stop display of Z, a "blue" image representing the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "blue", and two of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9A
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to Z, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the specific middle decorative symbol 8CZ, and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. It is a "blue" image and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the specific hold icon 9CZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R by the shift movement.
Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to produce a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that is the target of pre-reading. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 134
In (J), the state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown.
The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect D]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect D. In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-read display effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 135 (A),
The fourth hold on the far left is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. Further, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the loss mode "472". .. The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5",
The images representing "7" and "9" are "red", and the images representing the numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the specific images are represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ in which the first specific image is represented and the specific intermediate decorative symbol in which the second specific image is represented are displayed. 8CZ and specific right decorative pattern 8RZ
Is displayed as a temporary stop. This specific image is an image representing a specific object. The first specific image is an image in which a smiling face image and a quadrangular image in which the characters "chance" are inserted under the smiling face image are combined, and the whole is represented by "red". The second specific image is a smiling face image, and the whole is represented by "red". In addition, the specific target is a character, a living thing,
It is not limited to objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "red", and one of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) is stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol representing the first specific image, and the remaining two decorative symbols (middle decorative symbol 8C) are displayed. , Right decorative pattern 8R) is the second
The specific image of is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the second hold, the specific decorative symbol in which the specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ representing the first specific image, the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CZ, and the second specific image are displayed. Specific right decorative pattern 8RZ
Is displayed as a temporary stop. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect. The image is "red", and two of the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol representing the first specific image, and the remaining one decorative symbol is displayed. (Right decorative symbol 8R) is stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol on which the second specific image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold moves to the right (shift movement) by one, and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decoration are displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in the order of symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AZ of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the specific images are represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ, the specific middle decorative symbol 8CZ, and the specific right decorative symbol 8RZ on which the first specific image is represented are provisionally. Stop is displayed. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as a look-ahead effect.
The image is "red", and the first specific image is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
In, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by the hold digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the 0L display screen, the specific hold icon 9CZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R by the shift movement.
Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are used to produce a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the specific reserved icon 9CZ that is the target of pre-reading. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. Figure 135
In (J), the state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown.
The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C,) which is a combination of decorative symbols of the same type by pre-reading during fluctuations, It is possible to execute the first effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect. The degree of expectation of winning differs depending on the type of decorative pattern constituting 8R). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed. A set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R), which is a combination of the same types of decorative symbols as (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R), is temporarily stopped. The displayed second effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of temporary stops are displayed in the first effect during the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed. A set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols as the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) It is possible to execute the third effect that is temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, after the first effect, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is used to win. ,
Alternatively, a fixed stop display is displayed to notify the disconnection. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect.
Is a combination of decorative patterns of the same color (blue, red). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect.
Is a combination of decorative symbols of the first color (blue) and a combination of decorative symbols of the second color (red) different from the first color (blue). When the set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is a combination of the second color (red) decorative symbols, the first color (blue) decorative symbol The degree of expectation is higher than when it is a combination.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, the look-ahead effect during the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ three times, two times, and one time before is performed. For example, the specific hold icon 9AZ is performed. The look-ahead effect during the change two times before and one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ may be performed, or the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ may be performed. ..
[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol) which is a combination of decorative symbols of the same color is used as a changing look-ahead effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is temporarily stopped, but this set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) has the same figure, pattern, pattern,
It may be a combination of decorative patterns such as characters.
[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle) which is a combination of the same blue or red decorative symbols as a changing look-ahead effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. Decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is displayed as a temporary stop,
The color of the decorative pattern may be a color other than blue and red.
[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect D of FIG. 135, as a changing look-ahead effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol) which is a combination of decorative symbols having the same red color but different image types. 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is temporarily stopped and displayed, but at least one of the plurality of types is a combination of the same decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle). Decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
By pre-reading during the fluctuation, it is possible to execute the first effect in which the set of decorative symbols, which is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols, is temporarily stopped and displayed.
The degree of expectation of winning differs depending on the type of decorative symbols constituting the set of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1.
The set of decorative symbols that is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols as the set of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed. Is possible to execute the second effect in which is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-1 or aspect C5-2.
The set of decorative symbols that is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols as the set of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3.
After the first effect, the set of decorative symbols makes a definite stop display for notifying the hit or miss.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4.
The set of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is a combination of decorative symbols of the same color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5.
The set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is a combination of decorative symbols of the first color and a combination of decorative symbols of a second color different from the first color. If there is, there is,
When the set of decorative symbols is a combination of the decorative symbols of the second color, the first
Expectations are higher than when it is a combination of decorative patterns of the colors of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. This decorative pattern look-ahead effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol look-ahead effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. The display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the sub display device 10
An image is displayed on the display screen of (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).
Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol look-ahead effect, the left sub display device 10L
And the right sub-display device 10R) are changed in position and inclination.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead production A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect A. Decorative pattern look-ahead production A
First, as shown in FIG. 136A, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". Left sub-display device 1
In 0L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line.
Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead effect in which the specific hold icon 9AT, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 136 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AT will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 136 (A) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, and then the hold icon 9C disappears (holds and digests). As shown in FIG. 136 (B), in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion.
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. And the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C
, Right decorative symbol 8R starts variable display.

As shown in FIG. 136 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C after the variable display. At this time,
By pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the third hold, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, 3 of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT.
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation before the round, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the specific image is displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the images showing the numbers (here, "2" and "6") are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) is stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8
Temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of L, right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9AT
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, the numbers (here, "here,""
The image showing "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one to the right to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8
Temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of L, right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, and the specified medium decorative symbol 8CT, each of which represents a specific image, are temporarily stopped. Is displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed in the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT during the previous variation. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (H), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. To. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of pre-reading is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
The three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed in a, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and this corresponding image CRG is also a smiling face image. The corresponding image CRG is
It does not have to be the same as the specific image as long as it is an image corresponding to the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may represent the content of the specific image in characters, or may be a deformed shape of the specific image. The corresponding image CRG may be moved. Then, FIG. 136 (
As shown in J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R)
) Is displayed as a definite stop in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 136 (J), a state in which a fixed stop is displayed in a jackpot mode is shown. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead production B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect B. Decorative pattern look-ahead production B
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". Left sub-display device 1
In 0L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line.
Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead effect in which the specific hold icon 9AT, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 137 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AT will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 137 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 137 (A) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, and then the hold icon 9C disappears (holds and digests). As shown in FIG. 137 (B), in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion.
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. And the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C
, Right decorative symbol 8R starts variable display.

As shown in FIG. 137 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C after the variable display. At this time,
By pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the third hold, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, 3 of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT.
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation before the round, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the specific image is displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it represents a part on the left side of the smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is also referred to as a "first specific image". After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the images showing the numbers (here, "2" and "6") are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8
Temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of L, right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the first specific image is represented and the specific right decoration on which the second specific image is represented. The symbol 8RT is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. The second specific image represents a part of the right side of the smiling face image. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, an image showing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, as a look-ahead effect,
Two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one to the right to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8
Temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of L, right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the first
The specific left decorative symbol 8LT representing the specific image of, the specific right decorative symbol 8RT representing the second specific image, and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CT representing the third specific image are temporarily stopped and displayed. .. 1st
The specific image and the second specific image are the same as those represented by the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT during the previous variation. The third specific image represents a central part of the smiling face image. By arranging the first specific image, the second specific image, and the third specific image, one smiling face image is obtained. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (H), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. To. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of pre-reading is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
The three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed in a, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and the corresponding image CRG is a character image represented as "smile !!!".
As described above, the corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image and may not be the same as the specific image. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8).
L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is displayed as a fixed stop display in the form of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 137 (J) shows a state in which the fixed stop is displayed in the mode of a jackpot. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead production C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect C. Decorative pattern look-ahead production C
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". Left sub-display device 1
In 0L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line.
Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead effect in which the specific hold icon 9AT, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 138 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AT will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 138 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 138 (A) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, and then the hold icon 9C disappears (holds and digests). As shown in FIG. 138 (B), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion.
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. And the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C
, Right decorative symbol 8R starts variable display.

As shown in FIG. 138 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C after the variable display. At this time,
By pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the third hold, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, 3 of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT.
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation before the round, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the specific image is displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here, it is a character image representing the "ma" of hiragana. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is also referred to as a "first specific image". After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the images showing the numbers (here, "2" and "6") are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the fluctuation three times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8) is used as a look-ahead effect.
The specific decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in L).

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8
Temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of L, right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the first specific image is represented and the specific right decoration on which the second specific image is represented. The symbol 8RT is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. The second specific image is a character image representing the "ka" of hiragana. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed.
As usual, the image showing the number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion.
In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one to the right to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8
Temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of L, right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the first
The specific left decorative symbol 8LT representing the specific image of, the specific right decorative symbol 8RT representing the second specific image, and the specific intermediate decorative symbol 8CT representing the third specific image are temporarily stopped and displayed. .. 1st
The specific image and the second specific image are the same as those represented by the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT during the previous variation. The third specific image is a character image representing the "sa" of hiragana. By arranging the first specific image, the second specific image, and the third specific image, the word has one meaning of "no way". After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. in this way,
During the change immediately before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (H), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. To. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of pre-reading is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
The three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed in a, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is "No way"
The corresponding image CRG is a character image represented by "No way !!!". The corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be a character having the same meaning as the content of the specific image, or may be a character whose font is changed or converted into Roman characters or katakana. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. Figure 1
In 38 (J), a state in which a fixed stop is displayed in a jackpot mode is shown. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect D. Decorative pattern look-ahead production D
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) capable of notifying a hit or loss is also referred to as a "set of decorative symbols". Left sub-display device 1
In 0L, four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line.
Here, the decorative symbol look-ahead effect in which the specific hold icon 9AT, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative symbol will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 139 (A), the leftmost fourth hold icon 9AT will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 139 (A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 139 (A) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, and then the hold icon 9C disappears (holds and digests). As shown in FIG. 139 (B), in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion.
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th hold moves to the right side (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. And the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C
, Right decorative symbol 8R starts variable display.

As shown in FIG. 139 (C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (
The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C after the variable display. At this time,
By pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the third hold, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, 3 of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT.
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation before the round, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT on which the specific image is displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image that represents a specific object, and here, "No way !!!"
It is a character image representing. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the images showing the numbers (here, "2" and "6") are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the fluctuation three times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8) is used as a look-ahead effect.
A specific image is displayed in L).

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third holds moves to the right by one (shift movement), and becomes the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8
Temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of L, right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9AT
As a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, an image showing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (two decorative symbols (
The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed at the specific decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) one to the right to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variablely displayed, and then the left decorative symbol 8
Temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of L, right decorative symbol 8R, and middle decorative symbol 8C. At this time, by pre-reading the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative symbols in which the same specific image is represented on the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT, the specific right decorative symbol 8RT, and the specified medium decorative symbol 8CT on which the specific image is represented are temporarily stopped. Will be done. This specific image is the same as the one temporarily stopped and displayed on the specific left decorative symbol 8LT and the specific right decorative symbol 8RT during the previous variation. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R due to the hold digestion. In this way, during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (3) as a look-ahead effect.
The decorative design of (1) is stopped and displayed at the specific decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (H), in the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R), shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed by hold digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold moves (shifts) one to the right, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. To. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of pre-reading is started.

In the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
The three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed in a, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is "No way!
!! !! This is a character image representing ", and this corresponding image CRG is also a character image representing" No way !!! ". The corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be a character having the same meaning as the content of the specific image, or may be a character whose font is changed or converted into Roman characters or katakana. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8).
L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is displayed as a fixed stop display in the form of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 139 (J), a state in which a fixed stop is displayed in a jackpot mode is shown. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of hitting than usual.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern look-ahead effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, a specific decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one decorative symbol in a set of decorative symbols by pre-reading during fluctuation. It is possible to execute the first effect and the second effect in which the corresponding image CRG corresponding to the specific image represented by the specific decorative symbol is displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead after the first effect. it can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, a specific decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which a number of specific decorative symbols larger than the number of is temporarily stopped and displayed.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, during the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed, the temporary stop display is displayed in the first effect. It is possible to execute the fourth effect in which a number of specific decorative symbols smaller than the number of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, after the second effect, a fixed stop display for notifying a hit or miss is made by a set of decorative symbols. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 to 139, the specific decorative symbol includes an image representing a predetermined character, and in the second effect, the content is the same as that of the predetermined character. The image is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, in the third effect, all of the set of decorative symbols become specific decorative symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern look-ahead effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D, the number of specific decorative symbols is "0", "1", and "2" for each variable effect.
"3" will be added one by one. However, the number of specific decorative symbols may be increased arbitrarily. For example, after FIG. 138 (B), without executing FIGS. 138 (C) (D), FIG. 138.
(E) may be executed. In this case, the number of specific decorative symbols increases to "0", "2", and "3". Further, after FIG. 138 (B), FIG. 138 (G) may be executed without executing FIGS. 138 (C) to 138 (F). In this case, the number of specific decorative symbols increases to "0" and "3". The same applies to FIGS. 136, 137, and 139.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D, the look-ahead effect of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 has been described, but the decorative symbol look-ahead effect may be executed as the look-ahead effect of the hold icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2. ..

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D, the content of the specific image may be changed depending on the difference in the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the method of the look-ahead effect of FIG. 137 may have a higher expectation of a big hit than the look-ahead effect of FIG. 136.

[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D, the specific decorative symbol does not have to be displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol. For example, the specific decorative symbol is first displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol, and in the next variation, the intermediate decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol become the specific decorative symbol, and finally, all three become the specific decorative symbols. May be good.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D, the effect may end in the middle. For example, FIG. 138
After (A) to (F), FIG. 138 (A) may be executed again instead of FIG. 138 (G).

[Modification 6]
The contents of the decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not the image is a hit.
A first effect in which a specific decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one decorative symbol in the set of decorative symbols by pre-reading during fluctuation.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which an image corresponding to the image represented by the specific decorative symbol is displayed during the variation corresponding to the look-ahead.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1.
During the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, the number of the specific decorative symbols that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is larger than the number of the specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed. 3 effects can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or aspect C6-2.
During the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed, the number of the specific decorative symbols that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is smaller than the number of the specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed. The fourth production is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3.
After the second effect, the set of decorative symbols makes a definite stop display for notifying the hit or miss.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-4.
The specific decorative pattern includes an image representing a predetermined character, and includes an image representing a predetermined character.
In the second effect, an image having the same content as the predetermined character is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-2.
In the third effect, all of the set of decorative symbols become the specific decorative symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation image tilt display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. This operation image tilt display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and then analyzes the command.
When an instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 or the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) is included. And the image is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R ) Change the position and inclination.

[Operation image tilt display effect A]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect A. In the operation image tilt display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the opening image OPG showing "Erase smile !!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect as to whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the sub-display device 10 may display the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 140 (B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific target is
It is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are the same image, but different images (
For example, a smile and a crying face). The first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are
When displayed, the tilts of the images are displayed differently from each other. After that, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. After that, FIG.
As shown in 0 (C), the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other.
Move so that the display position changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific image TGs are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first
The specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF
1 and the second effect image EF2 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (E),
When the first effect image EF1 and the second effect image EF2 disappear, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are simultaneously displayed at the positions thereof, respectively. That is, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 emit light at the same time, and the first button image BTN1
And the second button image BTN2 are switched all at once (simultaneously). 1st button image BTN1 and 2nd
Each of the button images BTN2 is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is the same image here. When the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed at the same time, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2. Therefore, when the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed at the same time, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states. The first button image B
The TN1 and the second button image BTN2 may have different image sizes or different image shapes. First button image BTN on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
When the 1st and 2nd button images BTN2 are displayed, the tilts of the 1st button image BTN1 and the 2nd button image BTN2 are changed so that the tilts of the images are maintained different from each other. It is displayed in a state of being rotated left and right. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Move so that the display position changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN
After 2 stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, "2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Hit! !! The operation promotion image SPG represented by "" is displayed. The operation promotion image SPG is an image in which the operation valid period of the effect button 63 is currently in effect and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the effect of extinguishing the button image is executed as shown in FIGS. 140 (H) and 140 (I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, the button image BTN explodes one by one in order according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and switches to the explosion image EX. Here, first, the second button image BTN2 is switched to the second explosion image EX2, and then the first button image BTN1 is switched to the first explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, the smoke image KM representing the smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. In FIG. 140 (I), the second smoke image KM2 is displayed after the second explosion image EX2. In this way, the button images BTN explode one by one according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and when all of them explode, FIG. 140 (
As shown in J), three decorative symbols are displayed, and then the display is stopped. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit. In addition, the decorative design may be stopped and displayed in the form of loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect B]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect B. In the operation image tilt display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the opening image OPG showing "Erase smile !!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect as to whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the sub-display device 10 may display the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 141 (B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, the third specific image TG3, and the fourth are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG4 and is displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG
Reference numeral 4 denotes all the same images, but different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face) may be used. When the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states at random. After that, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes randomly.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 141 (C) to 141 (E), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific image TGs are randomly switched to the button image BTN or the select button image SKB. Here, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), the second specific image TG2 and the third specific image TG3 are simultaneously (simultaneously) the second select button image S.
Switch to KB2 and 3rd button image BTN3. The second select button image SKB2 is an image showing the appearance of the select button 68. The third button image BTN3 is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. When the second select button image SKB2 and the third button image BTN3 are displayed at the same time, the inclinations of the images are displayed in different states.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the first specific image TG1 is the first button image BTN1.
Switch to. The first button image BTN1 is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63.
It is the same image as the third button image BTN3. When the first button image BTN1 is displayed, the inclination of the image is displayed in a state different from that of the third button image BTN3. Next, FIG. 141
As shown in (E), the fourth specific image TG4 is switched to the fourth select button image SKB4. The fourth select button image SKB4 is an image showing the appearance of the select button 68, and is the same image as the second select button image SKB2. 4th select button image SKB
When displayed, the image 4 is displayed in a state in which the inclination of the image is different from that of the second select button image SKB2. The first button image BTN1, the second select button image SKB2, the third button image BTN3, and the fourth select button image SKB4 are stopped and displayed in a state in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. It should be noted that these may be displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), the operation promotion image SPG represented by “Strike !!” is displayed above the display screen 7a. The operation promotion image SPG is an image in which the operation valid period of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 is currently valid, and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63 and the select button 68. When the effect button 63 and the select button 68 are operated by the player, the effect of extinguishing the button image is executed as shown in FIGS. 141 (G) to 141 (I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are randomly disappeared in the main display device 7. Here, in response to the operation (pressing) of the select button 68, FIG. 141 (G)
As shown in, the select button image SKB explodes all at once and switches to the explosion images EX2 and EX4. After the explosion images EX2 and EX4 are displayed, the smoke images KM2 and KM4 representing the smoke after the explosion are displayed as shown in FIG. 141 (H), and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. Further, the button image BTN explodes one by one in order according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and the button image BTN is switched to the explosive image EX. Here, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), the third button image BTN3 is first switched to the third explosion image EX3, and then FIG.
As shown in 1 (I), the first button image BTN1 is switched to the first explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, the smoke image KM representing the smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. In FIG. 141 (I), the third smoke image KM3 is displayed after the third explosion image EX3. In this way, when the button image BTN and the select button image SKB explode in response to the operation (pressing) of the effect button 63 and the select button 68, and all of them explode, as shown in FIG. 141 (J), three decorations are used. The symbol is displayed, and then the stop is displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit. In addition, the decorative design may be stopped and displayed in the form of loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect C]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect C. In the operation image tilt display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the opening image OPG showing "Erase smile !!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect as to whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the sub-display device 10 may display the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 142 (B), when the game effect is started, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) are displayed on the display screen. 1 specific image TG1, 2nd specific image TG2, 3rd specific image TG3, 4th specific image TG4, 5th specific image TG5, 6th specific image TG6, 7th specific image TG
7 and the eighth specific image TG8 are displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. In addition, the specific target is a character, a living thing,
It is not limited to objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same image, but may be images different from each other (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are
When displayed, the lower side of the face image is tilted so as to face the center position of the arranged rings. In other words, when the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the inclinations of the images are displayed differently from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the first 1st
8 The colors of the specific images TG1 to TG8 randomly change while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific image TGs are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first
~ 8 Specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF1, the second effect image EF2, the third effect image EF3, the fourth effect image EF4, the fifth effect image EF5, and the sixth effect image EF5. Effect image EF6 and 7th effect image EF
7 and the 8th effect image EF8 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, and the third button image BTN3 are located at the positions, respectively. , The 4th button image BTN4, the 5th button image BTN5, the 6th button image BTN6, the 7th button image BTN7, and the 8th button image BTN8 are displayed at the same time. That is, the 1st to 8th
The specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time and are switched to the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 all at once (simultaneously). The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images showing the appearance of the effect button 63, respectively, and are the same images here. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states. The 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are
The sizes of the images may be different from each other, or the shapes of the images may be different. When the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are tilted respectively. Randomly change the color of the image while maintaining different states.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the in display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and then the ring is displayed. The operation promotion image SPG with the message "Strike !!" is displayed in the center. The operation promotion image SPG is an image in which the operation valid period of the effect button 63 is currently in effect and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the effect of extinguishing the button image is executed as shown in FIGS. 142 (H) and 142 (I). The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, the button images BTN arranged in a ring shape according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63.
Explode one by one and switch to the explosion image EX. Here, the first button image BT
N1, 2nd button image BTN2, 3rd button image BTN3, 4th button image BTN4, 5th button image BTN5, 6th button image BTN6, 7th button image BTN7, 8th button image BTN8, in order, 1st Explosion image EX1, 2nd explosion image EX2, 3rd explosion image EX
3, 4th explosion image EX4, 5th explosion image EX5, 6th explosion image EX6, 7th explosion image EX
The 7th and 8th explosion images are switched to EX8, and the display disappears from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, the button images BTN explode one by one according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and when all of them explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 142 (J). Is displayed, and then stopped. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit. In addition, the decorative design may be stopped and displayed in the form of loss.

[Operation image tilt display effect D]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect D. In the operation image tilt display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10)
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the opening image OPG showing "Erase smile !!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect as to whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of the decorative symbol, and the sub-display device 10 may display the hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 143 (B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, and the third specific image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. TG3, 4th specific image TG4, 5th specific image TG5, 6th specific image TG6, 7th
The specific image TG7 and the eighth specific image TG8 are displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the first
~ 8 Specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same images, but are different from each other (for example,
It may be a smile and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are main display devices 7.
Is displayed side by side in a ring shape on the display screen 7a of. When the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the lower side of the face image is tilted so as to face the center position of the arranged rings. In other words, when the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the inclinations of the images are displayed differently from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are enlarged and displayed while expanding the ring, and the images straddle the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, respectively. It is displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific image TGs are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first
~ 8 Specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF1, the second effect image EF2, the third effect image EF3, the fourth effect image EF4, the fifth effect image EF5, and the sixth effect image EF5. Effect image EF6 and 7th effect image EF
7 and the 8th effect image EF8 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, and the third button image BTN3 are located at the positions, respectively. , The 4th button image BTN4, the 5th button image BTN5, the 6th button image BTN6, the 7th button image BTN7, and the 8th button image BTN8 are displayed at the same time. That is, the 1st to 8th
The specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time and are switched to the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 all at once (simultaneously). The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images showing the appearance of the effect button 63, respectively, and are the same images here. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states. The 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are
The sizes of the images may be different from each other, or the shapes of the images may be different. When the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are tilted respectively. While maintaining a randomly different state, it moves while randomly rotating left and right, and the color of the image changes randomly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), the 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 straddle the in-display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 and are displayed again in a ring shape, and then the image BTN1 to BTN8 is displayed. The operation promotion image SPG with the message "Strike !!" is displayed in the center of the ring. Operation promotion image SPG
Is an image in which the present is the operation valid period of the effect button 63, and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, FIG. 143 (H)
) And FIG. 143 (I), the effect of extinguishing the button image is executed. The button image disappearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, the button image BTNs arranged in a ring explode one by one in order according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and the button image BTN is switched to the explosive image EX. Here, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, and the fourth button image BTN.
4, 5th button image BTN5, 6th button image BTN6, 7th button image BTN7, 8th
Button image BTN8, in order, 1st explosion image EX1, 2nd explosion image EX2, 3rd explosion image EX3, 4th explosion image EX4, 5th explosion image EX5, 6th explosion image EX6, 7th explosion image EX7, The eighth explosion image is switched to EX8, and the display disappears from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, the button image BTN is set to 1 according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63.
When they explode one by one and all of them explode, as shown in FIG. 143 (J), three decorative symbols are displayed, and then a stop display is displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the mode of a big hit. In addition, the decorative design may be stopped and displayed in the form of loss.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation image tilt display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 140 (E), 142 (E), and 143 (FIG. 143).
As shown in E), it is possible to execute a display effect in which a plurality of button image BTNs are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and in this display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of button image BTNs are different from each other. There is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), a plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The display effect can be executed, and in this display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are different from each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 140 (E), 142 (E), and 143 (FIG. 143).
As shown in E), in the display effect, the state in which the plurality of button image BTNs are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is simultaneously switched to the state in which all the plurality of operation means images are displayed. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS. 140 (C) to (E) and FIGS. 142 (C) to (1).
As shown in E) and FIGS. 143 (C) to 143 (E), in the display effect, all the plurality of specific image TGs are displayed from the state where the plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Switch to the button image BTN all at once. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, in the display effect, a plurality of specific image TGs are displayed side by side in a ring shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 143, it is possible to execute an extinction effect in which a plurality of button image BTNs disappear in order after the display effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 143, the extinction effect is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation image tilt display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image tilt display effects C to D of FIGS. 142 and 143, it has been described that no image is displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring shape. However, the images may be displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring shape. And, for example, when the game is successful, the image may change.

[Modification 2]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the game effects when the game is successful have been described. Therefore, when the game fails, different effects may be executed. For example, FIG. 142
In the case where all the BTN1 to BTN8 button images 1 to 8 are not erased within a predetermined period, the decorative symbol of the lost eye may be stopped and displayed.

[Modification 3]
The number of specific images and button images shown in the operation image tilt display effects A to D is an example, and a number of specific images and button images different from the above may be displayed.

[Modification example 4]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the button image disappearance effect may be executed without the player operating the effect button 63. That is, the button images may be sequentially switched to the explosion image EX without the player operating the effect button 63.

[Modification 5]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the operation promotion image SPG may be a character other than "hit !!". For example, the operation promotion image SPG may be "continuous hits !!". Also,
The opening image OPG may be characters other than "Erase Smile !!!". For example, the opening image OPG may be "Successful mission !!!".

[Modification 6]
The contents of the operation image tilt display effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the operation image tilt display effects A to D may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means.
It is possible to execute a display effect in which a plurality of the operation means images are displayed on the display means.
In the display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of operating means images are different from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1.
In the display effect, the state in which the plurality of operation means images are not displayed on the display means is simultaneously switched to the state in which all the plurality of operation means images are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target, and is
In the display effect, all the plurality of specific images are simultaneously switched to the operation means image from the state in which the plurality of the specific images are displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3.
In the display effect, the plurality of operation means images are displayed side by side in a ring shape.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4.
After the display effect, it is possible to execute an extinction effect in which the plurality of operation means images disappear in order.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5.
The extinction effect is executed in association with the operation of the operating means by the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol button stop effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147.
This decorative symbol button stop effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is,
When the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a, left. Sub display device 10L, right sub display device 10R
, Is an effect of displaying an image on an illumination panel 18 or the like. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect A. In the decorative symbol button stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the hold icon 9A
And the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In the button display effect 1, the button image ZF representing the effect button 63 while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating.
1 is displayed. This button image ZF1 has a decorative symbol 8 so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8L.
It is displayed at a position above the fluctuation region of L. As a result, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8L are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), the button pressing effect 1 is performed. In the button pressing effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF1. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is
"6 symbols" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), the button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are fluctuating.
Is displayed again. This button image ZF1 is displayed at a position on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8C. As a result, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8C are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), the button pressing effect 2 is performed. In the button pressing effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player who sees the button image ZF1 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), the button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed again while the decorative symbol 8R is changing. This button image ZF1 is displayed at the position of the variable region on the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8R. As a result, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8R are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (G), the button pressing effect 3 is performed. In the button pressing effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player who sees the button image ZF1 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative symbol 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect B. In the decorative symbol button stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the hold icon 9A
And the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF1, ZF2, and ZF3 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative symbol 8L so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8L. The button image ZF2 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8C. The button image ZF3 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative symbol 8R so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8R. As a result, the player associates the button image ZF1 with the decorative symbol 8L, associates the button image ZF2 with the decorative symbol 8C, and associates the button image ZF3 with the decorative symbol 8R.
It can be seen that and are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), the button pressing effect 1 is performed. In the button pressing effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF1. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is
"6 symbols" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), the button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF2 and the button image ZF3 are continuously displayed on the fluctuating area of the decorative symbols 8C and 8R while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), the button pressing effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player who sees the button image ZF2 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), the button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative symbol 8R is changing, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (G), the button pressing effect 3 is performed. In the button pressing effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player who sees the button image ZF3 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative symbol 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect C. In the decorative symbol button stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the hold icon 9A
And the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF1, ZF2, and ZF3 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8L so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8L. Button image ZF2 is a decorative pattern 8
It is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to C. The button image ZF3 is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8R so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8R. By these,
The player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8L are associated with each other, the button image ZF2 and the decorative symbol 8C are associated with each other, and the button image ZF3 and the decorative symbol 8R are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), the button pressing effect 1 is performed. In the button pressing effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF1. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is
"6 symbols" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), the button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF2 and the button image ZF3 are continuously displayed on the fluctuating area of the decorative symbols 8C and 8R while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), the button pressing effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player who sees the button image ZF2 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), the button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative symbol 8R is changing, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (G), the button pressing effect 3 is performed. In the button pressing effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player who sees the button image ZF3 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative symbol 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect D. In the decorative symbol button stop effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the hold icon 9A
And the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF4, ZF5, and ZF6 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The button image ZF4 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8L so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8L. The button image ZF5 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8C. The button image ZF6 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable region of the decorative symbol 8R so as to correspond to the decorative symbol 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative symbol 8L are associated with each other, the button image ZF2 and the decorative symbol 8C are associated with each other, and the button image ZF3 and the decorative symbol 8R are associated with each other. .. Further, the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF4 is displayed as "Ichi", the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF5 is displayed as "2", and the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF6 is "reference". Is displayed. The stop order suggestion display "Ichi" of the button image ZF4 indicates that when the effect button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed among the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The stop order suggestion display "2" of the button image ZF5 indicates that, among the fluctuating decorative symbols 8C and 8R, the corresponding decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed when the effect button 63 is pressed. The stop order suggestion display "reference" of ZF5 indicates that when the effect button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop order suggestion display of the button images ZF4, ZF5, ZF6 represents the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the effect button 63 is pressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), the button pressing effect 1 is performed. In the button pressing effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player pressing the effect button 63 who has seen the button image ZF4. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is
"6 symbols" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), the button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF5 and the button image ZF6 are continuously displayed on the fluctuating area of the decorative symbols 8C and 8R while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), the button pressing effect 2 is performed. In the button pressing effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player who sees the button image ZF5 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), the button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative symbol 8R is changing, the button image ZF6 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), the button pressing effect 3 is performed. In the button pressing effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when the player who sees the button image ZF6 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative symbol 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

The decorative pattern button stop effect is performed in the same variation. The decorative symbol button stop effect may be divided into a plurality of variations instead of the same variation. For example, in the decorative symbol button stop effect D, the button display effect 1, the button press effect 1 is the first variation, the button display effect 2, the button press effect 2 is the second variation, the button display effect 3, and the button press effect 3 May be performed by the third variation. Further, the decorative symbol button stop effect may be performed on a predetermined effect, for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a look-ahead effect. Further, in the decorative symbol button stop effect, the stop mode of the decorative symbol stopped by the button press effect 3 may be a chance eye (chance up display) for improving the jackpot expectation.

[Modification example]
In the above decorative symbol button stop effect, the decorative symbol 8L, 8 can be pressed once by pressing the effect button 63.
C and 8R may be stopped at the same time.
The decorative symbol button stop effect may be continuously performed with a plurality of fluctuations. For example, the decorative symbol button stop effect D may be performed by the first variation, the next second variation, the next third variation, and so on. In this case, even if the stop order suggestion display of the button image associated with the decorative symbol is changed and the order of the decorative symbols to be stopped among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed when the effect button 63 is pressed. Good. For example, in the first variation, the decorative symbol 8L is associated with the button image ZF4, the decorative symbol 8C is associated with the button image ZF5, and the decorative symbol 8R is associated with the button image ZF6. The stop order is as follows: decorative symbol 8L → decorative symbol 8C → decorative symbol 8R. In the second variation, the decorative symbol 8C is associated with the button image ZF4, the decorative symbol 8R is associated with the button image ZF5, and the decorative symbol 8L is assigned. The button image ZF6 may be associated with each other so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the order of decorative symbol 8C → decorative symbol 8R → decorative symbol 8L.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern button stop effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, when the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is variablely displayed, the button image is displayed, and then the effect button 6 is performed.
By operating 3, at least one of the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative symbol can be stopped from fluctuating by the player, so that the player can enjoy the fluctuating effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are a group of decorative symbols each consisting of a large number of decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are changing by operating the effect button 63 are displayed. At least one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative symbol can be stopped from fluctuating by the player, so that the player can enjoy the fluctuating effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol button stop effects B to D, the button image ZF1, the button image ZF2, and the button image ZF3 are displayed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed, and then the effect button 63 is operated. As a result, one of the decorative symbols 8L and / or the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative pattern can be stopped from fluctuating by the player, so that the player can enjoy the fluctuating effect. resulting in,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol button stop effects B to D, the button image ZF1, the button image ZF2, and the button image ZF3 are displayed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed, and then the effect button 63 is operated. As a result, one of the decorative symbols 8L is stopped and displayed, and then, by further operating the effect button 63, one of the decorative symbols 8C is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative symbols can be stopped by the player one by one, so that the player can enjoy the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed, the button image ZF4, the button image ZF5, and the button image ZF6 are displayed, and the stop order is suggested in these button images. An image is included, and each time the effect button 63 is operated, the variation of the decorative symbol associated with the button image including the stop order suggestion image is stopped in the order based on the stop order suggestion image. According to this configuration, the decorative symbols can be changed and stopped one by one by the player in a state where the stop order of the decorative symbols is known, so that the player can enjoy the variable effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZF-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation means that can be operated by a player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying a plurality of decorative patterns.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the first operation means representing the operation means.
The third display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner in the first display effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed by operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZF-1.
The plurality of decorative symbols include a first decorative symbol group and a second decorative symbol group.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, one of the first decorative symbol groups is stopped and displayed by operating the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZF-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation means image representing the operation means.
The fifth display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying at least one decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol group that is being variablely displayed in the first display effect.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then the fifth display effect is performed by operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZF-3.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed. After the second display effect and the fourth display effect, the operation means is operated to perform the third display effect, and after the third display effect, the operation means is again operated. The fifth display effect is performed by being operated.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZF-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying the first stop order suggestion image and the second stop order suggestion image.
The first stop order suggestion image is associated with the first operating means image in the second display effect, and when the operating means is operated, the first of the plurality of decorative symbols is described. It is an image suggesting that the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol group is stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbol group.
The second stop order suggestion image is associated with the second operating means image in the fourth display effect, and when the operating means is operated, the second of the plurality of decorative symbols It is an image suggesting that the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol group is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol group.
When the combination effect includes the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, and the sixth display effect. There is
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed when the second display effect and the fourth display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The first operation means image is on the fluctuation line of the first decorative symbol group. The second operating means image is on the variation line of the second decorative symbol group.
○ The stop order of the first decorative symbol group and the second decorative symbol group changes when the fluctuation changes.
○ The stop positions of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group deviate from the reach line. The decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol group are the same symbol.
○ The combination production is performed during the pseudo-continuous production.
○ The stop display mode of the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol group is a chance-up mode.
○ It is done with the same fluctuation.

The icon display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. This icon display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18
Is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Icon display effect A]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect A. In the icon effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A, 9C
Is a white hold icon with no pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), the icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG
3 is displayed. The icon ZG1 includes a character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo-continuous production and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character, which is different from the first character and the second character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (C), the icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, a plurality of icons ZG1,
ZG2 and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape. At this time, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z
G3 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (D), the icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form an effect from the first formation to the second formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with an interval between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), the icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z arranged in the second formation
This is an effect of selecting one of the G3 icons. The figure shows that the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG is the icon Z
Corresponds to the second character included in G2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Icon display effect B]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect B. In the icon effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 149 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A, 9C
Is a white hold icon with no pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (4 icons ZG1, 2 icons ZG2, 1)
One icon ZG3) appears (displays) on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) one by one. The icon ZG1 includes a character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo-continuous production and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character, which is different from the first character and the second character. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2
, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), the icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, a plurality of icons ZG1,
ZG2 and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape with an interval between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), the icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form an effect from the first formation to the second formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with spaces between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (E), the icon is retired. In this icon withdrawal appearance, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in the second formation state
However, the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub-display device 10) exits the display device one by one, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit. The figure shows that the three icons ZG1 have left and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (F), the icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device are displayed.
It is a production that appears on the display device again. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, the button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the substantially center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move behind (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (G), the icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect.
This is an effect of selecting one icon that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z reappearing in the icon reappearance effect.
Select one of the G3 icons. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows that the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG is the icon Z
Corresponds to the second character included in G2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Icon display effect C]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect C. In the icon effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 150 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A, 9C
Is a white hold icon with no pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (B), the icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (4 icons ZG1, 2 icons ZG2, 1)
One icon ZG3) appears (displays) on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) one by one. The icon ZG1 includes a character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo-continuous production and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character, which is different from the first character and the second character. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2
, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (C), the icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, a plurality of icons ZG1,
ZG2 and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape so as to overlap with the adjacent icon (contact with the adjacent icon). At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (D), the icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form an effect from the first formation to the second formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape so as to overlap with the adjacent icon (so as to be in contact with the adjacent icon). At this time, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG
2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (E), the icon is retired. In this icon withdrawal appearance, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in the second formation state
However, the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub-display device 10) exits the display device one by one, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit. The figure shows that the three icons ZG1 have left and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (F), the icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device are displayed.
It is a production that appears on the display device again. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, the button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the substantially center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move behind (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (G), the icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect.
This is an effect of selecting one icon that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z reappearing in the icon reappearance effect.
Select one of the G3 icons. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows that the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG is the icon Z
Corresponds to the second character included in G2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Icon display effect D]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect D. In the icon effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A, 9C
Is a white hold icon with no pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), the icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (4 icons ZG1, 2 icons ZG2, 1)
One icon ZG3) appears (displays) on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) one by one. The icon ZG1 includes a character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo-continuous production and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the character "SP" suggesting a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit", which suggests a jackpot, and a third character, which is different from the first character and the second character. Multiple icons ZG1, ZG2
, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), the icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, a plurality of icons ZG1,
ZG2 and ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape so as to overlap with the adjacent icon (contact with the adjacent icon). At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are moving (rotating) counterclockwise. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 may be moved clockwise, or may be moved so that the size of the formation (diameter of the circle) increases while maintaining the circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (D), the icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form an effect from the first formation to the second formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape so as to overlap with the adjacent icon (so as to be in contact with the adjacent icon). At this time, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG
The 2 and ZG3 may be moved (rotated) counterclockwise, or may be moved so as to increase the size of the formation while maintaining the H shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (E), the icon is retired. In this icon withdrawal appearance, multiple icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in the second formation state
However, the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub-display device 10) exits the display device one by one, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit. The figure shows that the three icons ZG1 have left and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (F), the icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device are displayed.
It is a production that appears on the display device again. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, the button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the substantially center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move behind (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (G), the icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have reappeared in the icon reappearance effect.
This is an effect of selecting one icon that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z reappearing in the icon reappearance effect.
Select one of the G3 icons. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows that the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (H), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed in a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG is the icon Z
Corresponds to the second character included in G2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Modification example]
In the above icon display effect, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 each include a character and a character suggesting subsequent development, but in addition to these, a jackpot expectation degree and the like may be added.
In the above icon display effects B to D, the positions of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that enter the display device at the time of the icon appearance effect and the positions that enter at the time of the icon withdrawal appearance are almost the same, but are different. May be good.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the above icon display effect, a plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG are displayed in the icon appearance effect.
After the effect of displaying 3 is performed, the effect of forming the first formation by the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG3 is performed, and then the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG are performed.
The production in which 3 forms the second formation is performed. According to this configuration, since the plurality of icons form two formations in order, it is possible to improve the interest of the icon production without getting tired of the icon production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above icon display effects B to D, in the icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1
, ZG2, ZG3 appear one by one, and a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are displayed. According to this configuration, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be recognized one by one, so that the interest of the icon production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon display effect D, the formation is formed so that the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 overlap each other in the icon formation effect.
According to this configuration, the gap between the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 is suppressed, so that
It is possible to easily recognize the outer shape of the formed formation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the icon production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above icon display effect D, in the icon formation effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 move within the formation while forming the formation. According to this configuration, the formation formed by the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be moved, so that the interest of the formation production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above icon display effects B to D, the display device (main display device 7) appears when the icon is withdrawn.
, In the sub-display device 10), after the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 form a formation, these plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move out of the display device one by one. According to this configuration, the exit of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be recognized one by one, so that the interest of the icon production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZG-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of icons.
The second display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons form a first formation.
The third display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons form a second formation.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZG-1.
The first display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons appear one by one on the display means from outside the display means to display the plurality of icons.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZG-1 or the aspect ZG-2.
In the second display effect or the third display effect, the plurality of icons are
Forming the formation so that they overlap each other,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-3.
In the second display effect or the third display effect, the plurality of icons are
Moving within the formation while forming the formation,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons exit the display means one by one from the display means.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ After the fourth display effect, a plurality of icons that have left the display means appear again one by one in the display means.
○ The icon that has exited the display means in the fourth display effect returns to the inside of the display means from the direction opposite to the exit direction. You may return from the same position as the exit position. In this case, the icon returning to the display means may be enlarged. Further, the icon returned in the display means or the operation means image representing the operation means may be displayed on the variable line of the decorative pattern. Further, an icon corresponding to the operation means image may be selected by operating the operation means, and an effect corresponding to the icon (such as a reach effect using the character of the icon) may be performed.

The effect execution confirmation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155. The effect execution confirmation effects A to D can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect execution confirmation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[Direction execution confirmation production A]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. on the other hand,
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), the preview image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance effect, the effect notice image PNG which is hexagonal and has "continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "2". Further, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (E), the execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation production,
As shown by the arrow YG3, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a, and moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the background of the effect preview image PNG is red. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (F), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the special symbol "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continue", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (G), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (H), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".

[Direction execution confirmation production B]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. on the other hand,
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (B), the preview image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance effect, the effect notice image PNG which is hexagonal and has "continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "2". Further, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (E), the preview image disappearance effect is executed. The notice image disappearance effect is an effect in which the effect notice image PNG disappears outside the screen of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (F), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display device 7a. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at "2", and the middle effect symbol 8C stops at "1". It should be noted that the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Direction execution confirmation production C]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. on the other hand,
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), the preview image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance effect, the effect notice image PNG which is hexagonal and has "continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continuation".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "2". Further, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), the preview image disappearance effect is executed. The notice image disappearance effect is an effect in which the effect notice image PNG disappears outside the screen of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (F), the temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the special symbol "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continue", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (G), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (H), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "7".

[Direction execution confirmation production D]
FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 155 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position).
It is in. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. on the other hand,
The reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), the preview image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance effect, the effect notice image PNG which is hexagonal and has "SP" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. This effect preview image PNG suggests an SP reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stopped at "2". Further, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (E), the execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation production,
As shown by the arrow YG3, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll around the area at the end of the display screen 7a, and moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the background of the effect preview image PNG is red. The reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (F), the reach development effect is executed. In this reach development effect, the message image MSG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the message image MSG is "developed".

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (G), the battle effect is executed. This battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, ally character C
If RA wins, expectations for big hits will increase. In this battle effect, the image of the portion of the image displayed on the display screen 7a covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot portions of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Therefore, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
Displayed in a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a jackpot arrangement on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "2".
It is stopped at. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect execution confirmed effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the effect notice image PNG on the display screen 7a, the effect notice image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, so that the effect notice image PNG is displayed.
The execution of the effect suggested by is determined (FIGS. 152 (B) to (E), FIGS. 155 (B) to (E)).
.. According to this configuration, since the whereabouts of the production notice image PNG are thrilled, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the effect preview image PNG on the display screen 7a, the area at the end of the display screen 7a is moved (FIGS. 152 (C) (D), 153 (C) (D)). , FIG. 154 (C) (D), FIG. 155 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, the production notice image PNG
Because I am thrilled about the whereabouts of, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview image PNG moves on a predetermined route of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 152 (C) (D), FIG. 153 (C) (D), FIG. 154 (C). ) (D
), FIGS. 155 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, the behavior of the effect preview image PNG can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect is performed using the effect preview image PNG that announces the effect to be executed later (FIGS. 152 (B), 153 (B), 154 (B), and 155 (B).
)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the effect to be executed later, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the notice image disappearance effect is executed so that the effect notice image PNG disappears outside the screen of the display screen 7a without moving to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (
FIG. 153 (E)), in principle, the non-execution of the effect suggested by the effect preview image PNG is determined. According to this configuration, since the whereabouts of the production notice image PNG are thrilled, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the effect notice image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the background of the effect notice image PNG turns red on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 152 (FIG. 152). E), FIG. 155 (E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the confirmation of the execution of the effect suggested by the effect preview image PNG, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect execution confirmed effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect preview image PNG that suggests the effect to be executed later is used, but an image that is not directly related to the later effect (for example, a message image such as "super hot") may be used.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the effect notice image PNG moves on the predetermined route of the display screen 7a, but is not limited to this. For example, if the effect preview image is a balloon-like image, the display screen 7a may be floated fluffy.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E2-1]
The first display device that can display images and produce effects,
A gaming machine provided with a second display device different from the first display device.
After displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the execution of the specific effect is determined by moving the predetermined image from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device. A game machine featuring.

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that after displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the predetermined image is moved on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2.
The predetermined image is a gaming machine characterized in that it moves on a predetermined route on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3.
The predetermined image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a preview image for notifying the execution of the specific effect.

[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in principle, non-execution of the specific effect is determined when the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device.

[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined image moves from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device, an execution confirmation effect is performed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-6.
The hold image corresponding to the hold storage can be displayed using the display screen of the second display device.
A gaming machine characterized in that the held image is displayed on a display device other than the second display device during the execution of the execution confirmation effect.

[Aspect E2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-7.
Even when the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the specific effect may be determined.

The reach development selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 156 to 159. This reach development selection effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Reach development selection production A]
FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect A. Reach development selection production A
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9
A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), the reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed from three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH1, reach effect selection area ZH2, and reach effect selection area ZH3) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3 have a circular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH1 includes the character "A reach". The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH1 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH2 includes the character "B reach". The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH2 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH3 includes the character "C reach". The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH3 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), the reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second area formed from three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH1A, reach effect selection area ZH2A, and reach effect selection area ZH3A) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, and ZH3A have a quadrangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, and ZH3A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3 of the first area, respectively, and the corresponding reach effect selection areas Z.
It is larger than H1, ZH2 and ZH3. Therefore, the second region is larger than the first region.
The reach effect selection area ZH1A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH1 of the first area, and includes the character “A reach”. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH1A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH2A is the reach effect selection area ZH of the first area.
It is an area corresponding to 2, and includes the character "B reach". The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH3A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH3 of the first area, and includes the character “C reach”. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH3A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), the reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH2A is shown by hatching, and the state in which the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed.
Is displayed as a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH performs various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Reach development selection production B]
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect B. Reach development selection production B
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9
A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), the reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed from three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH4, reach effect selection area ZH5, and reach effect selection area ZH6) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, and ZH6 have a circular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH4 includes the character "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH4 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH5 includes the character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH5 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH6 includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH6 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), the reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach effect selection effect 2, a second area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH4A, reach effect selection area ZH5A, reach effect selection area ZH6A, and reach effect selection area ZH7A) is displayed. .. Reach production selection areas ZH4A, ZH5A, ZH6A
It has a square shape and is arranged adjacent to each other. This reach effect selection area ZH4A, ZH5A, Z
H6A corresponds to the reach effect selection area ZH4, ZH5, ZH6 of the first area, respectively.
It is larger than the corresponding reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, ZH6. Therefore, the second region is larger than the first region. The reach effect selection area ZH4A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH4 of the first area, and includes the character "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" is the reach production selection area ZH4.
When A is selected, it suggests that A reach is performed in the reach production. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH5A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH5 of the first area, and includes the character “B reach”, the second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH5A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH6A includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH6A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH7A includes the character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH7A is selected, D reach is performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), the reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH2A is shown by hatching, and the state in which the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed.
Is displayed as a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CRZ, which is the second character included in the reach effect selection area ZH5A determined in the reach determination effect.
H produces various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Reach development selection production C]
FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect C. Reach development selection production C
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 158 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9
A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (B), the reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach effect selection effect 1, a first area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH8, reach effect selection area ZH9, reach effect selection area ZH10, and reach effect selection area ZH11) is displayed. .. The reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 have a triangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH8 includes the character "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH8 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9 includes the character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH9 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10 includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" is C in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH10 is selected.
It suggests that reach will take place. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11 includes the character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. This "E reach"
The character suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH11 is selected, E-reach is performed in the reach effect. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively higher than in the case of the three star marks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (C), the reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second reach effect selection area (reach effect selection area ZH8A, reach effect selection area ZH9A, reach effect selection area ZH10A, reach effect selection area ZH11A, and reach effect selection area ZH12A) is formed. Area is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A are trapezoidal and are arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the reach effect selection area ZH12A has a diamond shape, and the reach effect selection area ZH8A
, ZH9A, ZH10A, ZH11A are arranged substantially in the center. This reach production selection area Z
H8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A correspond to reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 in the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area have the same size because they correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, respectively. The reach effect selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes the character “A reach”, the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH8A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low.
The reach effect selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes the character “B reach”, the second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH9A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10A includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH10A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11A includes the character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The character "E reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH11A is selected, E reach is performed in the reach effect. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the three star marks. The reach effect selection area ZH12A includes the character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected, D reach is performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (D), the reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH12A is shown by hatching, and the state in which the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed.
Is displayed as a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CR, which is the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A determined in the reach determination effect.
ZH1 produces various effects. After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.

[Reach development selection production D]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect D. Reach development selection production D
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9
A and 9C are white hold icons without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (B), the reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach effect selection effect 1, a first area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH8, reach effect selection area ZH9, reach effect selection area ZH10, and reach effect selection area ZH11) is displayed. .. The reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 have a triangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH8 includes the character "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH8 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9 includes the character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH9 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10 includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" is C in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH10 is selected.
It suggests that reach will take place. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11 includes the character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. This "E reach"
The character suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH11 is selected, E-reach is performed in the reach effect. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is relatively higher than in the case of the three star marks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (C), the reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second reach effect selection area (reach effect selection area ZH8A, reach effect selection area ZH9A, reach effect selection area ZH10A, reach effect selection area ZH11A, and reach effect selection area ZH12A) is formed. Area is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A are trapezoidal and are arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the reach effect selection area ZH12A has a diamond shape, and the reach effect selection area ZH8A
, ZH9A, ZH10A, ZH11A are arranged substantially in the center. This reach production selection area Z
H8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A correspond to reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 in the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area have the same size because they correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, respectively. The reach effect selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes the character “A reach”, the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH8A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low.
The reach effect selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes the character “B reach”, the second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH9A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10A includes the character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH10A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11A includes the character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The character "E reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH11A is selected, E reach is performed in the reach effect. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the three star marks. The reach effect selection area ZH12A includes the character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" suggests that when the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected, D reach is performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and indicate that the jackpot expectation is extremely high. Further, the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A is
It has advanced to the reach effect selection area ZH8A and the reach effect selection area ZH9A adjacent to the reach effect selection area ZH12A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), the reach determination effect is performed. In this reach determination effect, one area is determined (selected) from the second area. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH12A is shown by hatching, and the state in which the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbols (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C are displayed.
Is displayed as a reach that fluctuates at high speed. In this reach effect, the character CR, which is the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A determined in the reach determination effect.
ZH1 produces various effects. After this reach effect, a lost symbol and a jackpot symbol are displayed.
The reach development selection effects A to D are performed under the same variation.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the reach development selection effect.
[Effect 1]
In the above reach development selection effect, a first area formed from a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and then a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2 are displayed.
A second area composed of A and ZH3A is displayed. According to this configuration, since two areas including different reach effect selection areas are displayed in order, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement at the time of reach selection. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above reach development selection effect, a first area formed from a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and then a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2 are displayed.
A second region composed of A and ZH3A is displayed, and the first region and the second region have the same size. According to this configuration, two regions that include a plurality of different reach selection regions and have the same size are displayed in order. Therefore, a plurality of reach selection regions are selected for the first region and the second region. It is possible to easily recognize the difference in the area, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement when selecting the reach. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the reach development selection effect, the plurality of reach effect selection areas are areas including a jackpot expectation suggestion image that suggests a jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of excitement at the time of reach selection. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the reach development selection effect, each of the plurality of reach effect selection areas is an area including a character image. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of excitement at the time of reach selection. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the reach development selection effect D, the character image included in the predetermined reach effect selection area advances to another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach effect selection area. According to this configuration, the characters included in the predetermined reach selection area can be made to stand out, and when the predetermined reach selection area is selected, the player can be given a greater sense of excitement. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZH-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas.
The reach effect selection area is an area including a reach effect suggestion image suggesting development to a predetermined reach effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZH-1.
The first region and the second region have the same size.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZH-1 or the aspect ZH-2.
The reach effect selection area is an area including a jackpot expectation suggestion image suggesting a jackpot expectation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZH-1 to ZH-3.
The reach effect selection area is an area including a character image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZH-4.
The character image included in the predetermined reach selection area advances to another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach selection area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The second region has a larger number of reach selection regions than the first region.
○ Each reach selection area in the second area and each reach selection area corresponding in the first area (first
The size or shape is different from the reach selection area) including the same reach effect suggestion image as the reach selection area of the area.
○ A specific reach selection area in the second area and a corresponding reach selection area in the first area (
The jackpot expectation degree and the character image do not change from the reach selection area including the same reach effect suggestion image as the reach selection area of the first area).
○ In the reach effect, a character image of the selected reach selection area appears.

The two-way group effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. This two-way group effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 1
When the 01 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to read the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L. , Right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18 and the like to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.
Is located in.

[Two-way group production A]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect A. In the two-way group production A, first
As shown in FIG. 160 (A), the decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are on the left sub-display device 10.
It is displayed below L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are
A white hold icon with no pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (B), the icon group display effect is performed. In this icon group display effect, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a, and the formation is moved to the right area of the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is displayed. It disappears out of. The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. In the icon group display effect, the first group image is displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a, and the heart image ZI1 moves at a relatively different speed without maintaining the formation of the display screen 7a. It may move to the right side area and disappear outside the display screen 7a. Further, as the icon image, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (C), a character group display effect is performed. In this character group display effect, a second group image including a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2, which are character images, is displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a, and the formation is moved to the left area of the display screen 7a to move to the left area of the display screen 7a. It disappears out of. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. In the character group display effect, the second group image is displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a, and the Nico Nico image ZI2 moves at a relatively different speed without maintaining the formation of the display screen 7a. You may move to the right side area and disappear outside the display screen 7a. Further, as the character image, a character image imitating the whole body wearing a combat uniform may be used instead of the Nico Nico image ZI2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, Nico Nico image ZI
A character image CRZI enlarged from 2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two-way group production B]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect B. In the two-way group production B, first
As shown in FIG. 161 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are on the left sub-display device 10.
It is displayed below L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are
A white hold icon with no pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), the group display effect 1 is performed. This group display production 1
Then, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed in the left side area of the display screen 7a, and the plurality of smiling images ZI2 which are character images are displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a. , The first group image moves in the first direction (the direction toward the right region of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction), and the second group image is in the direction opposite to the first direction. It moves in the direction (the direction toward the left side region of the display screen 7a, that is, the left direction).
The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has low transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. Nico Nico image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, when the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) are moved,
Move with a constant formation. Not limited to this, when the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. Further, when the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. As the icon image, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, as the character image, a character image imitating the whole body wearing a combat uniform may be used instead of the Nico Nico image ZI2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (C), the group display effect 2 is performed. This group display production 2
Then, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of smiling images Z)
After I2) and I2) overlap in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, the first group image moves in the first direction as it is, and moves from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. As it disappears, the second group image moves in the second direction as it is, and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. Therefore, the heart image Z
Since the transparency of I1 is low, if there is a heart image ZI1 before the smiling image ZI2,
The smiling image ZI2 is hidden in the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the smiling image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. In this case, if there is a smiling image ZI2 before the heart image ZI1,
The heart image ZI1 is hidden in the smiling image ZI2. Further, in the group display effect 2, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of smiling images ZI2) are displayed.
The display screen 7a may pass each other without overlapping near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, Nico Nico image ZI
A character image CRZI enlarged from 2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two-way group production C]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect C. In the two-way group production C, first
As shown in FIG. 162 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are on the left sub-display device 10.
It is displayed below L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are
A white hold icon with no pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), the group display effect 1 is performed. This group display production 1
Then, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed in the left side area of the display screen 7a, and the plurality of smiling images ZI2 which are character images are displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a. , The first group image moves in the first direction (the direction toward the right region of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction), and the second group image is in the direction opposite to the first direction. It moves in the direction (the direction toward the left side region of the display screen 7a, that is, the left direction).
The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. Nico Nico image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, when the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) are moved,
Move with a constant formation. Not limited to this, when the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. Further, when the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. As the icon image, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, as the character image, a character image imitating the whole body wearing a combat uniform may be used instead of the Nico Nico image ZI2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), the group display effect 2 is performed. This group display production 2
Then, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of smiling images Z)
After I2) and I2) overlap in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, the first group image moves in the first direction as it is, and moves from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. As it disappears, the second group image moves in the second direction as it is, and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. However, since the heart image ZI1 has high transparency, even if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smile image ZI2, the smile image ZI2 can be visually recognized through the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the smiling image ZI2 is the heart image Z.
It may be displayed in front of I1. Then, the transparency of the heart image ZI1 may be low, and the transparency of the smiling image ZI2 may be high. In this case, if there is a smiling image ZI2 in front of the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 becomes visible through the smiling image ZI2.
Further, in this group display effect 2, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) do not overlap in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a and pass each other. You may do so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, Nico Nico image ZI
A character image CRZI enlarged from 2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two-way group production D]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect D. In the two-way group production D, first
As shown in FIG. 163 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are on the left sub-display device 10.
It is displayed below L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A and 9C are
A white hold icon with no pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (B), the group display effect 1 is performed. This group display production 1
Then, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed on the left side area of the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L, and the plurality of smiling images ZI2 which are character images are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Displayed in the area, then the first group image is in the first direction (
The direction toward the right side region of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction, and the second direction in which the second group image is opposite to the first direction (direction toward the left side region of the display screen 7a). That is, it moves to the left). The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. Nico Nico image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of smiling images Z)
When I2) moves, it moves in a constant formation. Not limited to this
When the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation.
Further, when the second group image (plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. As the icon image, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, as the character image, a character image imitating the whole body wearing a combat uniform may be used instead of the Nico Nico image ZI2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), the group display effect 2 is performed. This group display production 2
Then, the first group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plurality of smiling images Z)
By moving with I2), the first group image moves in the first direction as it is after overlapping with the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R near the center of the display screen 7a. , The second group image disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a, moves in the second direction as it is, and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. .. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. However, since the heart image ZI1 has high transparency, even if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smile image ZI2, the smile image ZI2 can be visually recognized through the heart image ZI1. The heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2
When and, the smiling image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. Then, the transparency of the heart image ZI1 may be low, and the transparency of the smiling image ZI2 may be high. In this case, if there is a smiling image ZI2 in front of the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 becomes visible through the smiling image ZI2. In addition, in this group display production 2,
First group image (plurality of heart images ZI1) and second group image (plurality of smiling images ZI2)
You may make them pass each other without overlapping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (D), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display indicating the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, Nico Nico image ZI
A character image CRZI enlarged from 2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.
The two-way group effects A to D are performed in the same variation.

[Modification example]
In the two-way group effect, the first group image moves in the first direction (right direction), and the second group image moves in the second direction (left direction) opposite to the first direction. Move to, but not limited to
The first group image and the second group image may be moved in different directions from the opposite direction. For example, the first group image may move upward and the second group image may move leftward.
In the above two-way group production, the first group image is formed by the icon image, and the second group image is
Although it was formed by a character image, the first group image and the second group image may be formed by an icon image, and the first group image and the second group image may be formed. The group image is
It may be formed of a character image, or the first group image and the second group image may be formed of an image other than the icon image or the character image.
In the above two-way group effect, the character group display effect, the group display effect 1, or
A predetermined image may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 when the group display effect 2 is being performed. In this case, the predetermined image on the illumination panel 18 is
The first group image and / or the second group image is visibly displayed. For example, in the illumination panel 18, a predetermined image may be displayed on the display screen 7a, avoiding the area corresponding to the area where the first group image and the second group image overlap.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the two-way group production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the two-way group effect, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed, and the second group image including the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2 is displayed in the same variation. According to this configuration, since two group images are displayed in the same variation, it is possible to excite the group production and improve the interest of the group production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the two-way group effect, when the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed in the same variation, the second group image including the plurality of smiling images ZI2 is displayed. According to this configuration, since two group productions are performed at the same time in the same fluctuation, the group production can be excited and the interest of the group production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above two-way group effect, in the same variation, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in the first direction, and the second group image including the plurality of smiling images ZI2 moves in the first direction. Moves in a different second direction. According to this configuration, since the two group images move in different directions in the same fluctuation, the group effect can be dynamically and gorgeously performed, and the interest of the group effect can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above two-direction group effect, in the same variation, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in the first direction, and the second group image including the plurality of smiling images ZI2 moves in the first direction. Moves in the second direction in the opposite direction. According to this configuration, in the same fluctuation, the two group images move in the direction of relatively approaching or moving away from each other, so that the group production can be performed dynamically and brilliantly, and the interest of the group production can be improved. Can be done. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the two-way group effect, the heart image ZI1 of the first group image is an icon image, and the smiling image ZI2 of the second group image is a character image. According to this configuration, since the group production is performed by the group images of different categories in the same fluctuation, the group production can be performed gorgeously, and the interest of the group production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZI-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a moving first group image including a plurality of images.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a moving second group image including a plurality of images.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZI-1.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZI-2.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first group image moves in the first direction, and in the second display effect, the second group image moves in the first direction. Move in a second direction different from
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZI-3.
The first direction is the opposite direction of the second direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZI-4.
The plurality of images of the first group image are icon images, and are
The plurality of images of the second group image are character images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ The first group image and the second group image overlap. A plurality of images of one group image include a transparent portion through which at least a part is transmitted. A plurality of images of the second group image may also have a transparent portion.
○ A reach effect is performed using an image (for example, an icon image, a character image) that constitutes the first group image or the second group image.
○ The first group image and the second group image pass through the main display device and the sub display device. The first group image is generated from the main display device and the second group image is generated from the sub display device.
○ A third display device is provided in the foreground, and the first group image and the second group image can be seen through the gaps in the display images.

Hereinafter, the acquired ball output display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167. This acquired ball output display effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a , Left sub-display device 10L, right sub-display device 10R, illumination panel 18, etc. to display an image. The illumination panel 18
Is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Acquired ball display production A]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball output display effect A. In the acquired ball output display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 164 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), the effect of displaying the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, the planned acquisition number display ZJ2, the planned acquisition number display ZJ3, and the planned acquisition number display ZJ4 are displayed. Display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1
Is represented by the character "+15", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is represented by the characters "+105", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is represented by the characters "+150", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is "+300"
It is represented by the letters "", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300 balls". The ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displays the number of expected balls to be acquired are displayed in the same mode when representing the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different modes when representing different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same aspect" is, for example, the same color and / or pattern, and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font. Also, "different aspects" are, for example, different colors and / or patterns and / or sizes, and / or shapes, and / or fonts. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this production of the number of balls to be acquired, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3.
, ZJ4 may be made larger as the display indicates the larger number of acquired balls. For example, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is large, and the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. You may. In the figure, the appearance of different colors and patterns of the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is shown by using various hatchings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this maximum planned number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum number of planned balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. Maximum number of balls to be acquired ZJ5 represents the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired represented by the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, or is acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired, ZJ5, is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is 2000. In addition, in the production of displaying the maximum number of balls to be acquired,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
From the above decorative pattern fluctuation effect to the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (E), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. This payout acquisition display ZJ6
Indicates the number of balls acquired by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it is shown that it is one round. Character image C
RZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Also, in the jackpot game display production,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display production B]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball output display effect B. In the acquired ball output display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), the number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this planned acquisition number display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, the planned acquisition number display ZJ2, the planned acquisition number display ZJ3, and the planned acquisition number display ZJ4 are displayed. Display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1
Is represented by the character "+15", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is represented by the characters "+105", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is represented by the characters "+150", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is "+300"
It is represented by the letters "", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300 balls". The ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displays the number of expected balls to be acquired are displayed in the same mode when representing the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different modes when representing different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same aspect" is, for example, the same color and / or pattern, and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font. Also, "different aspects" are, for example, different colors and / or patterns and / or sizes, and / or shapes, and / or fonts. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this production of the number of balls to be acquired, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3.
, ZJ4 may be made larger as the display indicates the larger number of acquired balls. For example, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is large, and the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. You may. In the figure, the appearance of different colors and patterns of the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is shown by using various hatchings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (D), an enlarged display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this effect of expanding the number of balls to be acquired, the display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is an effect of expanding while moving (moving). Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (E), the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this maximum planned number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum number of planned balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. Maximum number of balls to be acquired ZJ5 represents the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired represented by the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, or is acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired, ZJ5, is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is 2000. In addition, in the production of displaying the maximum number of balls to be acquired,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
From the above decorative pattern fluctuation effect to the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (F), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. This payout acquisition display ZJ6
Indicates the number of balls acquired by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it is shown that it is one round. Character image C
RZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. In addition, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display production C]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball output display effect C. In the acquired ball output display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), the number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this planned acquisition number display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, the planned acquisition number display ZJ2, the planned acquisition number display ZJ3, and the planned acquisition number display ZJ4 are displayed. Display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1
Is represented by the character "+15", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is represented by the characters "+105", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is represented by the characters "+150", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is "+300"
It is represented by the letters "", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300 balls". The ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 displays the number of expected balls to be acquired are displayed in the same mode when representing the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different modes when representing different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, the "same aspect" is, for example, the same color and / or pattern, and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font. Also, "different aspects" are, for example, different colors and / or patterns and / or sizes, and / or shapes, and / or fonts. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this production of the number of balls to be acquired, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3.
, ZJ4 may be made larger as the display indicates the larger number of acquired balls. For example, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is large, and the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. You may. In the figure, the appearance of different colors and patterns of the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is shown by using various hatchings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (D), an enlarged display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this effect of expanding the number of balls to be acquired, the display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is an effect of expanding while moving (moving). Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (E), a reduction display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number reduction display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is reduced while moving (moving) toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a). .. Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. After the enlarged display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166 (D), the reduced display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166 (E) is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
After the effect of reducing the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166 (E), the effect of expanding the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 166 (D) may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (F), the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this maximum planned number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum number of planned balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. Maximum number of balls to be acquired ZJ5 represents the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired represented by the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, or is acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired, ZJ5, is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is 2000. In addition, in the production of displaying the maximum number of balls to be acquired,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
From the above decorative pattern fluctuation effect to the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (G), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. This payout acquisition display ZJ6
Indicates the number of balls acquired by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it is shown that it is one round. Character image C
RZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. In addition, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display production D]
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the acquired ball output display effect D. In the acquired ball output display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 167 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variablely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These hold icons 9A,
9C is a white hold icon without a handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), the number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this planned acquisition number display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, the planned acquisition number display ZJ2, the planned acquisition number display ZJ3, and the planned acquisition number display ZJ4 are displayed while moving and overlapping each other. To. The number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is represented by the characters "+15", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "15". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is
It is represented by the letters "+105", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is represented by the characters "+150", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is represented by the characters "+300", which suggests that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". Display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2
, ZJ3 and ZJ4 are displayed in the same mode when representing the same number of acquired balls, and are displayed in different modes when representing different numbers of acquired balls. In this case, "same aspect" refers to, for example, color and / or pattern, and / or size, and / or shape, and /.
Or the font is the same. Also, "different aspects" are, for example, colors and /
Alternatively, the pattern and / or size and / or shape and / or font are different. Further, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this production of the expected number of acquired balls, the size of the expected number of acquired balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 may be increased as the number of acquired balls is displayed. For example, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the largest, then the number of balls to be acquired ZJ2 is large, and the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. You may. In the figure, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ1, Z
Various hatching is used to show how the colors and patterns of J2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), an enlarged display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this effect of expanding the number of balls to be acquired, the display of the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 move and expand while overlapping with each other. In addition, in the enlarged display of the number of balls to be acquired,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (E), a reduction display effect of the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned acquisition number reduction display effect, the planned acquisition number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 move and reduce toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a) and overlap each other. Further, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In addition, after the enlarged display effect of the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 167 (D),
The production of reducing the number of balls to be acquired in FIG. 167 (E) is performed, but the display is not limited to this, and FIG. 16
After the effect of reducing the number of balls to be acquired in 7 (E), the effect of increasing the number of balls to be acquired in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (F), the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed. In this maximum planned number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum number of planned balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is displayed. Maximum number of balls to be acquired ZJ5 represents the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be acquired represented by the maximum number of balls to be acquired display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be acquired displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, or is acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of balls to be acquired, ZJ5, is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game is 2000. In addition, in the production of displaying the maximum number of balls to be acquired,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
From the above decorative pattern fluctuation effect to the maximum number of balls to be acquired display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (G), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. This payout acquisition display ZJ6
Indicates the number of balls acquired by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of balls to be acquired (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it is shown that it is one round. Character image C
RZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. In addition, in the production of displaying the number of balls to be acquired,
The jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned earned ball display effect, the decorative symbol variation effect to the maximum expected number of balls display effect are performed with the same variation, and the jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, but the number of balls to be acquired is not limited to this. Display production, expansion display production of the number of balls to be acquired, reduction display production of the number of balls to be acquired,
The maximum number of balls to be acquired may be displayed during the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning ball display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the above-mentioned earned ball display effect, after the jackpot symbol is displayed to notify the jackpot, a plurality of planned winning ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are performed, and then the maximum acquisition is performed. A production was performed to display the planned number of balls ZJ5, and then
A jackpot game production is performed. According to this configuration, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ1, ZJ2.
, ZJ3, ZJ4 can recognize the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game, and then ZJ5 can recognize the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game. Later, it becomes possible to enjoy great joy and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned acquisition ball output display production, a plurality of expected acquisition ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, Z
When the production of J4 is performed, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed. ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ
The number of balls to be acquired indicating the same number of balls among 3 and ZJ4 is displayed in the same mode (for example, color and /
Alternatively, the pattern and / or size and / or shape and / or font are the same). According to this configuration, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3,
In ZJ4, it becomes easier to recognize the display of the number of balls to be acquired with the same number of balls to be acquired, in other words, it becomes easier to find the display of the number of balls to be acquired with different numbers of balls to be acquired. Can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned acquisition ball output display production, a plurality of expected acquisition ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, Z
When the production of J4 is performed, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed. ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ
The number of balls to be acquired, which represents a different number of balls among 3 and ZJ4, has different modes (for example, color and / or pattern and / or size, and / or shape, and / or font). ) Is displayed. According to this configuration, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ1, ZJ2, Z
In J3 and ZJ4, it becomes easier to recognize the display of the number of balls to be acquired with the same number of balls to be acquired, in other words, it becomes easier to find the display of the number of balls to be acquired with different numbers of balls to be acquired, and the display effect related to the number of balls to be acquired is displayed. Can improve the interest of. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above-mentioned acquisition ball output display production, before the jackpot game production, a plurality of planned acquisition ball number display ZJ1
, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 will be expanded. According to this configuration, the expected number of acquired balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are emphasized, so that it becomes easier to recognize the displayed number of expected acquired balls, and the interest of the display effect related to the number of acquired balls is improved. Can be made to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned acquisition ball output display production, before the jackpot game production, a plurality of planned acquisition ball number display ZJ1
, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are moved to a predetermined position and reduced, and then the maximum number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ5. According to this configuration, the number of balls to be acquired is displayed ZJ1,
After the ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 become difficult to recognize and drive the player's anxiety, the maximum number of balls to be acquired is recognized, and the player can feel a lot of excitement. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect ZJ-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot symbol to notify the jackpot.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of planned acquisition media representing the number of game media that can be acquired in the jackpot game.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the maximum number of media to be acquired, which represents the maximum number of media that can be acquired in the jackpot game.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed. After the third display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZJ-1.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, among the plurality of display of the number of planned acquisition media, the display of the number of planned acquisition media representing the same number of media is displayed in the same manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZJ-2.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, among the plurality of display of the number of planned acquisition media, the display of the number of planned acquisition media representing a different number of media is displayed in a different manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZJ-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of expanding the display of the number of media to be acquired.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect, and may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed after the fifth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect ZJ-3 or the aspect ZJ-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of reducing the display of the plurality of planned acquisition media while moving the display to a predetermined position.
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect, and may include the sixth display effect.
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the sixth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be applied.
○ Display the number of media to be acquired so that they overlap each other while moving.
○ The display of the number of media to be acquired is three-dimensional.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the select button 68. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls.
It is not limited to this. For example, instead of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 60 to 167, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses display devices (main display device 7, sub-display device 10, etc.) to perform various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect.
That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above.
Further, although the gaming machine 1 includes a sub display device 10 in addition to the main display device 7 (display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. It may be performed, or the display effect performed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 may be performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Main display device 10 ... Sub display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (hold icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 17 ... Large winning opening opening opening 20 ... 1st starting opening (1st entry opening)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd ball entry port)
64 ... Sub-display screen 66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
The display means is configured to be movable between a first position and a second position.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
The display means
In the first position, the first effect of displaying the hold icon and
When the pseudo-continuous effect by the decorative symbol is executed after the first effect, the process moves from the first position toward the second position, and the hold icon is not displayed at the second position. The second effect of displaying the number of pseudo-reams in
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect of moving from the second position to the first position without displaying the pseudo-ream count.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Claims (6)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
It is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the angles of the plurality of hold icons in the line-up direction change while maintaining the display.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction after the line-up angle changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 3.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting the line-up direction while maintaining the display.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
In the arrangement direction change effect, in the display means, the display position of one or more of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons is changed, so that the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged is changed. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The display means is configured to be rotatable and can be rotated.
In the arrangement direction change effect, the rotation of the display means changes the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means are arranged.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images